D-Link DGS-1100-10/ME

Metro Ethernet Managed Switch

CLI Reference Guide

V1.0
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2014 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.

Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D-Link Corporation is strictly forbidden.

Trademarks used in this text: D-Link and the D-Link logo are trademarks of D-Link Corporation; Microsoft and
Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the
marks and names or their products. D-Link Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with this user’s guide, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning
This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Warnung!
Dies ist ein Produkt der Klasse B. Im Wohnbereich kann dieses Produkt Funkstoerungen verursachen. In
diesem Fall kann vom Benutzer verlangt werden, angemessene Massnahmen zu ergreifen.
Precaución!
Este es un producto de Clase B. En un entorno doméstico, puede causar interferencias de radio, en cuyo case,
puede requerirse al usuario para que adopte las medidas adecuadas.
Attention!
Ceci est un produit de classe B. Dans un environnement domestique, ce produit pourrait causer des
interférences radio, auquel cas l`utilisateur devrait prendre les mesures adéquates.
Attenzione!
Il presente prodotto appartiene alla classe B. Se utilizzato in ambiente domestico il prodotto può causare
interferenze radio, nel cui caso è possibile che l`utente debba assumere provvedimenti adeguati.

VCCI Warning

March, 2014
 Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 1
USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ........................................................................................................... 2
COMMAND SYNTAX ............................................................................................................................................... 5
BASIC SWITCH COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................. 7
enable password encryption .................................................................................................................................................. 8
disable password encryption ................................................................................................................................................. 8
create account ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
config account ......................................................................................................................................................................10
show account ........................................................................................................................................................................10
delete account .......................................................................................................................................................................11
show session.........................................................................................................................................................................11
show switch ..........................................................................................................................................................................12
enable web ...........................................................................................................................................................................12
disable web...........................................................................................................................................................................13
enable autoconfig .................................................................................................................................................................13
disable autoconfig ................................................................................................................................................................14
show autoconfig ...................................................................................................................................................................14
show config ..........................................................................................................................................................................15
enable jumbo_frame .............................................................................................................................................................16
disable jumbo_frame ............................................................................................................................................................16
show jumbo_frame ...............................................................................................................................................................17
save ......................................................................................................................................................................................17
reboot ...................................................................................................................................................................................18
reset system ..........................................................................................................................................................................18
logout ...................................................................................................................................................................................19
ping ......................................................................................................................................................................................19
ping6 ....................................................................................................................................................................................20
enable telnet .........................................................................................................................................................................21
disable telnet ........................................................................................................................................................................21
config time_range ................................................................................................................................................................21
show time_range ..................................................................................................................................................................22
MODIFY BANNER AND PROMPT COMMANDS .................................................................................................24
config command_prompt .....................................................................................................................................................24
config greeting_message ......................................................................................................................................................25
show greeting_message ........................................................................................................................................................26
SWITCH PORT COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................27
config ports ..........................................................................................................................................................................27
show ports ............................................................................................................................................................................28
show duld ports ....................................................................................................................................................................29
LOOPBACK DETECTION COMMANDS ...............................................................................................................30
enable loopdetect..................................................................................................................................................................30
disable loopdetect.................................................................................................................................................................30
config loopdetect mode ........................................................................................................................................................31
config loopdetect ports .........................................................................................................................................................31
 config loopdetect ..................................................................................................................................................................32
show loopdetect....................................................................................................................................................................32
PPPOE CIRCUIT ID INSERTION COMMANDS ....................................................................................................34
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state ................................................................................................................................34
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports................................................................................................................................35
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ..........................................................................................................................................36
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports .................................................................................................................................36
NETWORK MANAGEMENT (SNMP) COMMANDS .............................................................................................37
create snmp user ...................................................................................................................................................................39
delete snmp user ...................................................................................................................................................................39
show snmp user ....................................................................................................................................................................40
create snmp view ..................................................................................................................................................................40
delete snmp view ..................................................................................................................................................................41
show snmp view ...................................................................................................................................................................42
create snmp community .......................................................................................................................................................42
delete snmp community .......................................................................................................................................................43
show snmp community ........................................................................................................................................................43
config snmp engineID ..........................................................................................................................................................44
create snmp group ................................................................................................................................................................44
delete snmp group ................................................................................................................................................................46
show snmp groups ................................................................................................................................................................46
show snmp global state ........................................................................................................................................................47
create snmp host ...................................................................................................................................................................47
delete snmp host ...................................................................................................................................................................48
show snmp host ....................................................................................................................................................................49
create snmp v6host ...............................................................................................................................................................50
delete snmp v6host ...............................................................................................................................................................51
show snmp v6host ................................................................................................................................................................51
enable snmp traps .................................................................................................................................................................52
disable snmp traps ................................................................................................................................................................52
show snmp traps ...................................................................................................................................................................52
enable snmp authenticate traps.............................................................................................................................................53
disable snmp authenticate traps ............................................................................................................................................54
config syslocation ................................................................................................................................................................54
config sysname .....................................................................................................................................................................54
enable snmp .........................................................................................................................................................................55
disable snmp .........................................................................................................................................................................55
enable snmp fiber_port_link traps ........................................................................................................................................56
disable snmp fiber_port_link traps .......................................................................................................................................56
enable snmp LBD traps ........................................................................................................................................................56
disable snmp LBD traps .......................................................................................................................................................57
enable snmp port_security_violation traps ...........................................................................................................................57
disable snmp port_security_violation traps ..........................................................................................................................58
enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps ..............................................................................................................................58
disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps .............................................................................................................................58
DOWNLOAD/UPLOAD COMMANDS ...................................................................................................................60
download ..............................................................................................................................................................................60
 upload ...................................................................................................................................................................................61
DHCP RELAY COMMANDS ..................................................................................................................................63
enable dhcp_relay ................................................................................................................................................................63
disable dhcp_relay................................................................................................................................................................64
config dhcp_relay add ipif System .......................................................................................................................................64
config dhcp_relay delete ipif System ...................................................................................................................................65
config dhcp_relay hops .......................................................................................................................................................65
config dhcp_relay option_82................................................................................................................................................66
show dhcp_relay ..................................................................................................................................................................67
enable dhcp_local_relay .......................................................................................................................................................67
disable dhcp_local_relay ......................................................................................................................................................68
config dhcp_local_relay .......................................................................................................................................................68
show dhcp_local_relay .........................................................................................................................................................69
enable dhcpv6_relay ............................................................................................................................................................69
disable dhcp6_relay..............................................................................................................................................................69
show dhcpv6_relay ..............................................................................................................................................................70
config dhcpv6_relay .............................................................................................................................................................70
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count ...........................................................................................................................................71
config dhcpv6_relay option_37 ............................................................................................................................................71
NETWORK MONITORING COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................73
show packet ports .................................................................................................................................................................73
show error ports ...................................................................................................................................................................74
show utilization ....................................................................................................................................................................75
clear counters .......................................................................................................................................................................76
clear log................................................................................................................................................................................76
show log ...............................................................................................................................................................................76
save log ................................................................................................................................................................................77
enable syslog ........................................................................................................................................................................77
disable syslog .......................................................................................................................................................................78
create syslog host .................................................................................................................................................................78
config syslog host.................................................................................................................................................................80
delete syslog host .................................................................................................................................................................82
show syslog host ..................................................................................................................................................................83
cable diagnostic port ............................................................................................................................................................83
FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................85
create fdb vlan ......................................................................................................................................................................85
create multicast_fdb .............................................................................................................................................................86
config multicast_fdb ............................................................................................................................................................86
config fdb aging_time ..........................................................................................................................................................87
delete fdb ..............................................................................................................................................................................87
show multicast_fdb ..............................................................................................................................................................88
show fdb ...............................................................................................................................................................................88
config multicast port_filtering_mode ...................................................................................................................................89
show multicast port_filtering_mode.....................................................................................................................................90
BROADCAST STORM CONTROL COMMANDS .................................................................................................91
config traffic control ............................................................................................................................................................91
show traffic control ..............................................................................................................................................................92
 config traffic_control trap ....................................................................................................................................................92
QOS COMMANDS .................................................................................................................................................94
config bandwidth_control ....................................................................................................................................................94
show bandwidth_control ......................................................................................................................................................95
config qos mode ...................................................................................................................................................................95
show qos mode .....................................................................................................................................................................96
config scheduling_mechanism .............................................................................................................................................96
show scheduling_mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................97
config dscp_mapping ...........................................................................................................................................................97
show dscp_mapping .............................................................................................................................................................98
RMON COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................................................99
enable rmon ..........................................................................................................................................................................99
disable rmon .......................................................................................................................................................................100
create rmon alarm...............................................................................................................................................................100
delete rmon alarm...............................................................................................................................................................101
create rmon collection stats ................................................................................................................................................101
delete rmon collection stats ................................................................................................................................................102
create rmon collection history ............................................................................................................................................102
delete rmon collection history ............................................................................................................................................103
create rmon event ...............................................................................................................................................................103
delete rmon event ...............................................................................................................................................................104
show rmon ..........................................................................................................................................................................104
PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS .......................................................................................................................106
enable mirror ......................................................................................................................................................................106
disable mirror .....................................................................................................................................................................106
create mirror id ...................................................................................................................................................................107
config mirror ......................................................................................................................................................................107
show mirror ........................................................................................................................................................................108
VLAN COMMANDS .............................................................................................................................................110
create vlan ..........................................................................................................................................................................110
delete vlan ..........................................................................................................................................................................111
config vlan .........................................................................................................................................................................111
show vlan ...........................................................................................................................................................................112
enable asymmetric_vlan .....................................................................................................................................................113
disable asymmetric_vlan ....................................................................................................................................................113
show asymmetric_vlan .......................................................................................................................................................113
enable management vlan ....................................................................................................................................................114
disable management vlan ...................................................................................................................................................114
config management vlan ....................................................................................................................................................115
show management vlan ......................................................................................................................................................115
show port_vlan pvid ...........................................................................................................................................................116
Q-IN-Q COMMANDS ............................................................................................................................................117
enable qinq .........................................................................................................................................................................117
disable qinq ........................................................................................................................................................................117
show qinq ...........................................................................................................................................................................118
config qinq ports ................................................................................................................................................................118
BASIC IP COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................................120
 config ipif System ..............................................................................................................................................................120
show ipif.............................................................................................................................................................................121
MAC NOTIFICATION COMMANDS ....................................................................................................................122
enable mac_notification .....................................................................................................................................................122
disable mac_notification ....................................................................................................................................................122
config mac_notification .....................................................................................................................................................123
config mac_notification ports ............................................................................................................................................123
show mac_notification .......................................................................................................................................................124
show mac_notification ports ..............................................................................................................................................124
IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS..........................................................................................................................126
enable igmp_snooping .......................................................................................................................................................127
disable igmp_snooping.......................................................................................................................................................127
show igmp_snooping .........................................................................................................................................................128
config igmp_snooping........................................................................................................................................................128
config igmp_snooping querier ...........................................................................................................................................129
create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan ................................................................................................................................130
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan ...............................................................................................................................130
delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan ................................................................................................................................131
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group ....................................................................................................................132
config router_ports .............................................................................................................................................................132
config igmp access_authentication ports............................................................................................................................133
show igmp access_authentication ports .............................................................................................................................133
enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan ...............................................................................................................................134
disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan ..............................................................................................................................134
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan .................................................................................................................................135
show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group ......................................................................................................................136
show igmp_snooping group ...............................................................................................................................................136
show igmp_snooping host ..................................................................................................................................................137
show router_port ................................................................................................................................................................137
MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................139
enable mld_snooping .........................................................................................................................................................139
disable mld_snooping ........................................................................................................................................................140
config mld_snooping..........................................................................................................................................................140
config mld_snooping router_ports .....................................................................................................................................141
config mld_snooping querier .............................................................................................................................................141
show mld_snooping ...........................................................................................................................................................143
show mld_snooping group .................................................................................................................................................143
show mld_snooping router_ports .......................................................................................................................................144
show mld_snooping host ....................................................................................................................................................145
LIMITED IP MULTICAST ADDRESS COMMANDS ............................................................................................146
create mcast_filter_profile .................................................................................................................................................146
config mcast_filter_profile ................................................................................................................................................147
config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 ........................................................................................................................................147
delete mcast_filter_profile .................................................................................................................................................148
show mcast_filter_profile...................................................................................................................................................148
config limited_multicast_addr ports...................................................................................................................................149
show limited_multicast_addr ports ....................................................................................................................................150
 show max_mcast_group ports ............................................................................................................................................150
802.1X COMMANDS ............................................................................................................................................152
enable 802.1x .....................................................................................................................................................................153
disable 802.1x ....................................................................................................................................................................153
show 802.1x .......................................................................................................................................................................153
show 802.1x auth_state ......................................................................................................................................................154
show 802.1x auth_configuration ........................................................................................................................................155
config 802.1x auth_parameter ports ...................................................................................................................................156
config 802.1x auth_protocol ..............................................................................................................................................157
config radius add ................................................................................................................................................................158
config radius delete ............................................................................................................................................................159
config radius .......................................................................................................................................................................159
show radius ........................................................................................................................................................................160
config 802.1x auth_mode ...................................................................................................................................................160
create 802.1x guest_vlan ....................................................................................................................................................161
delete 802.1x guest_vlan ....................................................................................................................................................161
config 802.1x guest_vlan ports ..........................................................................................................................................162
show 802.1x guest_vlan .....................................................................................................................................................162
create 802.1x user ..............................................................................................................................................................163
show 802.1x user................................................................................................................................................................163
delete 802.1x user ..............................................................................................................................................................164
config 802.1x capability ports ............................................................................................................................................164
PORT SECURITY COMMANDS ..........................................................................................................................166
config port_security ...........................................................................................................................................................166
show port_security .............................................................................................................................................................167
PORT PRIORITY COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................168
config port_priority ............................................................................................................................................................168
show port_priority ..............................................................................................................................................................168
TIME AND SNTP COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................170
config sntp ..........................................................................................................................................................................170
show sntp ...........................................................................................................................................................................171
enable sntp .........................................................................................................................................................................172
disable sntp .........................................................................................................................................................................172
config time .........................................................................................................................................................................173
config time_zone operator..................................................................................................................................................173
config dst ............................................................................................................................................................................174
show time ...........................................................................................................................................................................175
ARP COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................................176
config arp_aging time ........................................................................................................................................................176
show arpentry .....................................................................................................................................................................176
IPV6 NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY COMMANDS.....................................................................................................178
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif .........................................................................................................................................178
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ................................................................................................................................................179
show ipv6 neighbor_cache .................................................................................................................................................179
config ipv6 nd ns ipif .........................................................................................................................................................180
show ipv6 nd ......................................................................................................................................................................180
create ipv6route default ......................................................................................................................................................181
 delete ipv6route default ......................................................................................................................................................181
show ipv6route ...................................................................................................................................................................182
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System ..........................................................................................................................182
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System .........................................................................................................................183
BANNER COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................................184
config log_save_timing ......................................................................................................................................................184
show log .............................................................................................................................................................................185
COMMAND HISTORY LIST COMMANDS ..........................................................................................................186
? ..........................................................................................................................................................................................186
show command_history .....................................................................................................................................................187
dir .......................................................................................................................................................................................188
ACCESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDS ....................................................................................189
create authen_login method_list_name ..............................................................................................................................190
config authen_login............................................................................................................................................................190
delete authen_login method_list_name ..............................................................................................................................191
show authen_login .............................................................................................................................................................192
create authen_enable method_list_name ............................................................................................................................193
config authen_enable .........................................................................................................................................................193
delete authen_enable method_list_name ............................................................................................................................195
show authen_enable ...........................................................................................................................................................195
enable authen_policy..........................................................................................................................................................196
disable authen_policy .........................................................................................................................................................196
show authen_policy............................................................................................................................................................197
config authen application ...................................................................................................................................................197
show authen application .....................................................................................................................................................198
config authen parameter .....................................................................................................................................................198
show authen parameter .......................................................................................................................................................199
create authen server_host ...................................................................................................................................................199
config authen server_host ..................................................................................................................................................200
delete authen server_host ...................................................................................................................................................201
show authen server_host ....................................................................................................................................................202
create authen server_group ................................................................................................................................................203
config authen server_group ................................................................................................................................................203
delete authen server_group ................................................................................................................................................204
show authen server_group..................................................................................................................................................204
enable admin ......................................................................................................................................................................205
POWER SAVING COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................206
config power_saving mode ................................................................................................................................................206
config power_saving ..........................................................................................................................................................206
show power_saving ............................................................................................................................................................207
LLDP COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................................................208
enable lldp ..........................................................................................................................................................................208
disable lldp .........................................................................................................................................................................209
config lldp message_tx_interval.........................................................................................................................................209
config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier ............................................................................................................................210
config lldp reinit_delay ......................................................................................................................................................210
config lldp tx_delay ...........................................................................................................................................................211
 show lldp ............................................................................................................................................................................211
show lldp ports ...................................................................................................................................................................212
show lldp local_ports .........................................................................................................................................................213
show lldp remote_ports ......................................................................................................................................................213
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................214
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................214
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................215
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................215
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................216
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................216
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................217
config lldp ports .................................................................................................................................................................217
show lldp mgt_addr ............................................................................................................................................................218
show lldp statistics .............................................................................................................................................................218
TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION COMMANDS ..........................................................................................................220
config traffic_segmentation ...............................................................................................................................................220
show traffic_segmentation .................................................................................................................................................220
ETHERNET OAM COMMANDS ..........................................................................................................................222
config ethernet_oam ports (mode) .....................................................................................................................................223
config ethernet_oam ports (state) .......................................................................................................................................223
config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error symbol) .....................................................................................................224
config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame) .......................................................................................................225
config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame seconds) ..........................................................................................226
config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame period) ............................................................................................227
config ethernet_oam ports (remote loopback)....................................................................................................................227
config ethernet_oam ports (received remote loopback) .....................................................................................................228
show ethernet_oam ports (status) .......................................................................................................................................229
show ethernet_oam ports (configuration)...........................................................................................................................231
show ethernet_oam ports (statistics) ..................................................................................................................................231
show ethernet_oam ports (event log) .................................................................................................................................232
clear ethernet_oam ports ....................................................................................................................................................233
SAFEGUARD COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................234
config safeguard_engine ....................................................................................................................................................234
show safeguard_engine ......................................................................................................................................................234
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

1
INTRODUCTION
The DGS-1100-10/ME consists of 8 10/100/1000Mbps ports plus 2 100/100/SFP ports.
The Switch can be managed through the Telnet or the Web-based management agent. The Command Line
Interface (CLI) can be used to configure and manage the Switch via the Telnet interfaces.
This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI. Configuration and management
of the Switch via the Web-based management agent is discussed in the Manual. For detailed information on
installing hardware please refer also to the Manual.

Setting the Switch’s IP Address

Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network
manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP). The Switch’s default IP address is
10.90.90.90. You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address
scheme.
The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory.
The Switch’s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch Information
(Basic Settings) window in the Configuration folder.
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager. The Switch
IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address
assigned to the Switch must be known.

Alternatively, users can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z. Where the x’s represent the IP
address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of
subnets in CIDR notation.

The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then
be used to connect a management station to the Switch’s Telnet or Web-based management agent.

Figure 1–1 Assigning an IP Address

In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.90.90.91 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0.
The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully. The Switch can now be
configured and managed via Telnet, SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent
using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.

1
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

2
USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
The Switch allows a computer or terminal to perform some basic monitoring and configuration tasks by using the
Command Line Interface (CLI) via TELNET protocol.

NOTE: Switch configuration settings are saved to non-volatile RAM using the save command.
The current configuration will then be retained in the Switch’s NV-RAM, and reloaded when the
Switch is rebooted. If the Switch is rebooted without using the save command, the last
configuration saved to NV-RAM is loaded.

The command line functions are accessed over a Telnet interface. Once an IP address for the Switch has been
set, A Telnet program can be used (in VT-100 compatible terminal mode) to access and control the Switch.
After the Switch reboots and you have to logged in, the console looks like this:

Figure 2–1 Initial Console Screen after Logging In

Commands are entered at the command prompt, DGS-1100-10/ME:5>
There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI. Entering the ? command displays a list of all of the
top-level commands.

Figure 2–2 The ? Command

When entering a command without its required parameters, the CLI displays the prompt: command: config
account message and the options listed below.

2
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Figure 2–3 Example Command Parameter Help

In this case, the command config account was entered with the parameter <username>. The CLI will then
prompt to enter the <username> with the message, command: config account. Every command in the CLI has
this feature, and complex commands have several layers of parameter prompting.
In addition, after typing any given command plus one space, users can see all of the next possible sub-
commands, in sequential order, by pressing the ? key.
To re-enter the previous command at the command prompt, press the up arrow cursor key. The previous
command appears at the command prompt.

Figure 2–4 Using the Up Arrow to Re-enter a Command

In the above example, the command config account was entered without the required parameter <username>,
the CLI returned the command: config account prompt. The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re-enter
the previous command (config account) at the command prompt. Now the appropriate username can be entered
and the config account command re-executed.
All commands in the CLI function in this way. In addition, the syntax of the help prompts are the same as
presented in this manual angle brackets < > indicate a numerical value or character string. The < > can also
indicate a word with a number for character allowed.
If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI, the top-level commands are displayed under the
Available commands: prompt.

3
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Figure 2–5 Available Commands

The top-level commands consist of commands such as show or config. Most of these commands require one or
more parameters to narrow the top-level command. This is equivalent to show what? or config what? Where the
what? is the next parameter.
For example, entering the show command with no additional parameters, the CLI will then display all of the
possible next parameters.

Figure 2–6 Next possible completions: Show Command

In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At the next
command prompt in the example, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the
account parameter. The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.

4
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

3
COMMAND SYNTAX
The following symbols are used to describe how command entries are made and values and arguments are
specified in this manual. The online help contained in the CLI and available through the Telnet uses the same
syntax.

NOTE: All commands are case-sensitive. Be sure to disable Caps Lock or any other unwanted
function that changes text case.

<angle brackets>
Purpose Encloses a variable or value that must be specified.
Syntax create account [admin | oper |user] <username 15>
Description In the above syntax example, supply a username in the
<username> space. Do not type the angle brackets.
Example create account admin newadmin1
Command

[square brackets]
Purpose Encloses a required value or set of required arguments. One value
or argument can be specified.
Syntax create account [admin | oper |user] <username 15>
Description In the above syntax example, specify admin, oper or a user level
account to be created. Do not type the square brackets.
Example create account user newuser1
Command

| vertical bar
Purpose Separates two or more mutually exclusive items in a list, one of
which must be entered.
Syntax create account [admin | oper | user] <username 15>
Description In the above syntax example, specify admin, oper, or user. Do not
type the vertical bar.
Example create account user newuser1
Command

All commands are case-sensitive. Be sure to disable Caps Lock or any other unwanted function that changes
text case.

5
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

{braces}
Purpose Encloses an optional value or set of optional arguments.
Syntax reset
Description Execute “reset” will return the switch to its factory default setting.
Example reset
command Please be aware that all configurations will be reset to default value.
Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset now? (Y/N)[N] N

Line Editing Key Usage

Delete Deletes the character under the cursor and then shifts the
remaining characters in the line to the left.
Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and then shifts the
remaining characters in the line to the left.
Insert or Ctrl+R Toggle on and off. When toggled on, inserts text and shifts previous
text to the right.
Left Arrow Moves the cursor to the left.
Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the right.
Up Arrow Repeats the previously entered command. Each time the up arrow
is pressed, the command previous to that displayed appears. This
way it is possible to review the command history for the current
session. Use the down arrow to progress sequentially forward
through the command history list.
Down Arrow The down arrow displays the next command in the command
history entered in the current session. This displays each command
sequentially as it was entered. Use the up arrow to review previous
commands.
Tab Shifts the cursor to the next field to the left.

Multiple Page Display Control Keys

Space Displays the next page.
CTRL+c Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be
displayed.
ESC Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be
displayed.
n Displays the next page.
p Displays the previous page.
q Stops the display of remaining pages when multiple pages are to be
displayed.
r Refreshes the pages currently displayed.
a Displays the remaining pages without pausing between pages.
Enter Displays the next line or table entry.

6
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

4
BASIC SWITCH COMMANDS
The Basic Switch commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable password
encryption
disable password
encryption
create account [admin | operator | user] <username 15>
config account <username 15>
show account
delete account <username 15>
show session
show switch
enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
disable web
enable autoconfig
disable autoconfig
show autoconfig
[[config_in_nvram config_id <value 1-2>] | current_config] [begin | exclude]
show config
<string 80>
enable jumbo_frame
disable jumbo_frame
show jumbo_frame
save [config | log]
reboot
reset system {[include | force_agree]}
logout
ping {times <value 0-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | size <value 1-60000>}
ping6 <ipv6_addr> {size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | times <value 1-255>}
enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
disable telnet
<range_name 20> [hours start_time <start_time 32> end_time <end_time 32>
config time_range weekdays <daylist 32> date from_day year <start_year 2011-2029> month
<start_mth 1-12> date <start_date 1-31> to_day year <end_year 2011-2029>

7
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command Parameter
month <end_mth 1-12> date <end_date 1-31> | delete]
show time_range

Each command is listed in detail as follows:

enable password encryption

Purpose Used to enable password encryption on a user account.
Syntax enable password encryption
Description The user account configuration information will be stored in the
configuration file, and can be applied to the system at a time in the
future. If the password encryption is enabled, the password will be in
encrypted form. If password encryption is disabled and the user
specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has
been converted to encrypted form by the last enabled password
encryption command, the password will still be in encrypted form. It
can not revert back to plain text.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable password encryption on the Switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> enable password encryption
Command: enable password encryption

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable password encryption

Purpose Used to disable password encryption on a user account.
Syntax disable password encryption
Description The user account configuration information will be stored in the
configuration file, and can be applied to the system at a time in the
future. If the password encryption is enabled, the password will be in
encrypted form. If password encryption is disabled and the user
specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has
been converted to encrypted form by the last enabled password
encryption command, the password will still be in encrypted form. It
can not revert back to plain text.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrat level users can issue this command.

8
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To disable password encryption on the Switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> disable password encryption
Command: disable password encryption

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create account
Purpose To create user accounts.
Syntax create account [admin | operator | user] <username 15>
Description The create account command creates an administrator, operator,
or user account that consists of a username and an optional
password. Up to 31 accounts can be created. You can enter
username and Enter. In this case, the system prompts for the
account’s password, which may be between 0 and 15 characters.
Alternatively, you can enter the username and password on the
same line.
Parameters admin − Name of the administrator account.
oper − Specify an operator level account.
user − Specify a user account with read-only permissions.
<username 1-15> − The account username may be between 1 and
15 characters.
password <password_string> {encrypted} - the account password
can be included, and (optionally) can be encrypted.
Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command.
Usernames can be between 1 and 15 characters.
Passwords can be between 0 and 15 characters.

NOTE: You are not required to enter a User Name. However, if you do not enter a User Name,
you cannot perform the following actions:
- Create a monitor or operator (level 1 or level 14) users until an administrator user (level
15) is defined.
- Delete the last administrator user if there are monitor and/or operator users defined.

Example usage:
To create an administrator-level user account with the username ‘dlink’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create account admin dlink

Command: create account admin dlink

Enter a case-sensitive new password:***

Enter the new password again for confirmation:***

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

9
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config account
Purpose To change the password for an existing user account.
Syntax config account <username 15>
Description The config account command changes the password for a user
account that has been created using the create account command.
The system prompts for the account’s new password, which may be
between 0 and 15 characters.
Parameters <username 15> − the account username.
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the user password of ‘dlink’ account:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config account dlink

Command: config account dlink

Enter a old password:***

Enter a case-sensitive new password:****

Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show account
Purpose To display information about all user accounts on the Switch.
Syntax show account
Description The show account command displays all account usernames and
their access levels created on the Switch. Up to 31 user accounts
can exist on the Switch at one time.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display an account which has been created:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show account

Command: show account

Username Access Level

------------------ -------------------
dlink Admin

10
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Total Entries : 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete account
Purpose To delete an existing user account.
Syntax delete account <username 15>
Description The delete account command deletes a user account that has been
created using the create account command.
Parameters <username 15> − the account username.
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the user account ‘System’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> delete account System

Command: delete account System

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show session
Purpose To display information about currently logged-in users.
Syntax show session
Description The show session command displays a list of all the users that are
logged-in at the time the command is issued. The information
includes the session ID (0 for the first logged-in user, 1 for the next
logged-in user, etc.), the Protocol used to connect to the Switch, the
user’s IP address, the user’s access Level (1=user, 15=admin), and
the account name on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the way users logged in:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show session

Command: show session

ID Login Time Live Time From Level Name

-- ----------------------------- ------------- -------------- --------- ----------------
0 1/1/2013 00:11:05 00:07:33 Telnet 3 anonymous

Total Entries: 1

11
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show switch
Purpose To display information about the Switch.
Syntax show switch
Description The show switch command displays information about the Switch
settings, including Device Type, MAC Address, IP configuration,
Hardware/Software version, System information, and Switch
Network configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the Switch information:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show switch

Command: show switch

Device Type :DGS-1100-10/ME V1.00.002

MAC Address :DE-AD-BE-EF-01-02
IP Address :10.90.90.90
VLAN Name :default
Subnet Mask :255.0.0.0
Default Gateway :0.0.0.0
System boot version :0.09.03
System firmware version :V1.00.002
System hardware version :A1
System serial number :1MB1733K0000A
System name :
System Location :
System up time :0 days, 0 hrs, 13 min, 43 secs
System Contact :
System Time :00:13:47 01 01 2013
IGMP Snooping :Disabled
802.1X Status :Disabled
Telnet :Enabled <TCP 23>
Web :Enabled <TCP 80>
RMON :Disabled
Syslog Global State :Disabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable web
Purpose To enable the HTTP-based management software on the Switch.

12
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Syntax enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}

Description The enable web command enables the Web-based management
software on the Switch. The user can specify the TCP port number
the Switch uses to listen for Telnet requests.
Parameters <tcp_port_number 1-65535> − The TCP port number. TCP ports are
numbered between 1 and 65535. The ‘well-known’ port for the Web-
based management software is 80.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable HTTP and configure the TCP port number to listen for Telnet requests:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> enable web

Command: enable web

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable web
Purpose To disable the HTTP-based management software on the Switch.
Syntax disable web
Description The disable web command disables the Web-based management
software on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable HTTP-based management software on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> disable web

Command: disable web

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable autoconfig
Purpose Used to activate the auto configuration function for the Switch. This
will load a previously saved configuration file for current use.
Syntax enable autoconfig
Description When autoconfig is enabled on the Switch, the DHCP reply will
contain a configuration file and path name. It will then request the file
from the TFTP server specified in the reply. When autoconfig is
enabled, the ipif settings will automatically become DHCP client.
Parameters None.

13
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions When autoconfig is enabled, the Switch becomes a DHCP client

automatically (same as: config ipif System dhcp). The DHCP server
must have the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name,
and be configured to deliver this information in the data field of the
DHCP reply packet. The TFTP server must be running and have the
requested configuration file in its base directory when the request is
received from the Switch. Consult the DHCP server and TFTP
server software instructions for information on loading a
configuration file.
If the Switch is unable to complete the auto configuration process
the previously saved local configuration file present in Switch
memory will be loaded.

Example usage:
To enable auto configuration on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> enable autoconfig

Command: enable autoconfig

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable autoconfig
Purpose Use this to deactivate auto configuration from DHCP.
Syntax disable autoconfig
Description The disable autoconfig command is used to instruct the Switch not
to accept auto configuration instruction from the DHCP server. This
does not change the IP settings of the Switch. The ipif settings will
continue as DHCP client until changed with the config ipif command.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. .

Example usage:
To stop the auto configuration function:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> disable autoconfig

Command: disable autoconfig

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show autoconfig
Purpose Used to display the current autoconfig status of the Switch.
Syntax show autoconfig
Description The show autoconfig command is used to list the current status of
the auto configuration function.

14
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the autoconfig status:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show autoconfig

Command: show autoconfig

Autoconfig State: Enabled

Timeout : 50 sec

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show config
Purpose To display the current or saved version of the configuration settings
of the Switch.
Syntax show config [[config_in_nvram config_id <value 1-2>] |
current_config] [begin | exclude | include] <string 80>
Description The show config command is used to list the current status of the
configuration settings of the Switch.
Parameters config_in_nvram config_id <value 1-2> − Display the system
configuration from NV-RAM.
current_config − Display system configuration from the DRAM
database, i.e. the current system setting.
[begin | exclude | include] − Display the configuration which is
begined, excluded or included.
<string 80> − Display the configuration which begin or exclude the
specified string. The maximum string is 80.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the autoconfig status:

#---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# DGS-1100-10/ME Gigabit Ethernet Switch Configuration
#
# Firmware: Build 1.00.002
# Copyright(C) 20113 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
command-start

# SNMP
enable snmp
config snmp engineID 80:00:08:1c:04:46:53

15
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

disable snmp authenticate traps

disable snmp coldstart traps
disable snmp warmstart traps
disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps
disable snmp fiber_port_link traps
disable snmp port_security_violation traps
disable snmp LBD traps
disable snmp upgrade_state traps
disable snmp duplicate_ip_detected traps
echo off
delete snmp community private
delete snmp community public
echo on
create snmp user ReadOnly ReadOnly v1
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a ALL

enable jumbo_frame
Purpose To enable jumbo frames on the device.
Syntax enable jumbo_frame
Description The enable jumbo_frame command enables jumbo frames on the
device.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.
Jumbo frames will be enabled after save and restart.

Example usage:
To enable jumbo frames:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> enable jumbo_frame

Command: enable jumbo_frame.

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable jumbo_frame
Purpose To disable jumbo frames on the device.
Syntax disable jumbo_frame
Description The disable jumbo_frame command disables jumbo frames on the
device.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.
Jumbo frames will be disabled after save and restart.

16
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To disable jumbo_frames:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> disable jumbo_frame

Command: disable jumbo_frame

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show jumbo_frame
Purpose To display the jumbo frame configuration.
Syntax show jumbo_frame
Description The show jumbo_frame command displays the jumbo frame
configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To show the jumbo_frames configuration status on the device:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show jumbo_frame

Command: show jumbo_frame

Jumbo Frame is Enabled.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

save
Purpose To save changes in the Switch’s configuration to non-volatile RAM.
Syntax save [config> | log ]
Description The save command used to enter the current switch configuration
into non-volatile RAM. The saved switch configuration will be loaded
into the Switch’s memory each time the Switch is restarted.
Parameters config – Used to save the current configuration to a file.
log – Used to save the current log to a file. The log file cannot be
deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To save the Switch’s current configuration to non-volatile RAM:

17
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> save config

Command: save config

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

reboot
Purpose To reboot the Switch.
Syntax reboot
Description The reboot command restarts the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To restart the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> reboot
Command: reboot

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>
DGS-1100-10/ME Switch

DGS-1100-10/ME login:

reset system
Purpose To reset the Switch to the factory default settings.
Syntax reset system {[include | force_agree]}
Description The reset system command restores the Switch’s configuration to
the default settings assigned from the factory. Rebooting will clear all
entries in the Forwarding Data Base.
Parameters system − If the keyword ‘system’ is specified all of the factory default
settings are restored on the Switch. The Switch will save and reboot
after the settings are changed to default. Rebooting will clear all
entries in the Forwarding Data Base.
{[include | force_agree]} - When force_agree is specified, the reset
command will be executed immediately without further confirmation.
If no parameter is specified, the Switch’s current IP address, user
accounts, and the switch history log are not changed. All other
parameters are restored to the factory default settings. The Switch
will not save or reboot.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

18
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To restore all of the Switch’s parameters to their default values:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> reset system

Command: reset system

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

DGS-1100-10/ME Switch

DGS-1100-10/ME login:

logout
Purpose To log out a user from the Switch.
Syntax Logout
Description The logout command terminates the current user’s session on the
Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To terminate the current user’s Telnet session:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> logout

ping
Purpose To test the connectivity between network devices.
Syntax ping <ipaddr> {times <value 0-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | size
<value 1-60000>}
Description The ping command sends Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) echo messages to a remote IP address. The remote IP
address then ‘echos’ or returns the message. This is used to confirm
connectivity between the Switch and the remote device.
Parameters <ipaddr> - The IP address of the host.
times <value 0-255> - The number of individual ICMP echo
messages to be sent. The maximum value is 255. The default is 4.
timeout <sec 1-99> - The time-out period while waiting for a
response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be
specified. The default is 1 second.
size <value 1-60000> - Specify the size of the test packet. A value of
0 to 2080 can be specified.
Restrictions None.

19
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To ping the IP address 10.90.90.97 three times:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> ping 10.90.90.97 times 3 size 100 timeout 3

Command: ping 10.90.90.97 times 10 size 100 timeout 3

Reply Not Received From : 10.90.90.97, Timeout : 3 secs

Reply Not Received From : 10.90.90.97, Timeout : 3 secs
Reply Not Received From : 10.90.90.97, Timeout : 3 secs

--- 10.90.90.97 Ping Statistics ---

3 Packets Transmitted, 0 Packets Received, 100% Packets Loss
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

ping6
Purpose To test the IPv6 connectivity between network devices.
Syntax ping6 <ipv6addr> {size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> |
times <value 1-255>}
Description The ping6 command sends IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) echo messages to a remote IPv6 address. The remote IPv6
address will then “echo” or return the message. This is used to
confirm the IPv6 connectivity between the switch and the remote
device.
Parameters <ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the host.
size <value 1-6000> - Specify the size of the test packet. A value of
1 to 6000 can be specified.
timeout <sec 1-99> - The time-out period while waiting for a
response from the remote device. A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be
specified. The default is 1 second.
times <value 1-255> - The number of individual ICMP echo
messages to be sent. The maximum value is 255. The default is 4.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To ping the IPv6 address to “3000::1” four times:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>ping6 3000::1 times 4

Command: ping6 3000::1 times 4

Reply From : 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms

Reply From : 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply From : 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms
Reply From : 3000::1, bytes=200, time<10ms

--- 3000::1 Ping Statistics ---

4 Packets Transmitted, 4 Packets Received, 0% Packets Loss

20
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable telnet
Purpose To enable the telnet.
Syntax enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Description The enable telnet command enables telnet.
Parameters <tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Specify the TCP port number for the
telnet setting.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To enable telnet:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable telnet
Command: enable telnet

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable telnet
Purpose To disable telnet.
Syntax disable telnet
Description The disable telnet command disables telnet.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To disable telnet:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable telnet
Command: disable telnet

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config time_range
Purpose To configure the time range on the Switch.
Syntax config time_range <range_name 20> [[hours start_time
<start_time 32> end_time <end_time 32> weekdays <daylist 32>
date from_day year <start_year 2011-2029> month <start_mth 1-
12> date <start_date 1-31> to_day year <end_year 2011-2029>

21
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

month <end_mth 1-12> date <end_date 1-31>] | delete]

Description The config time_range command defines time ranges for access
lists. If the end time is earlier than the start time, the end time will
move to the following day
Parameters <range_name 20> – Specifies the time range name. The range of
characters is 1 - 20.
start_time <start_time 32> – defines the time on which the time
range will start to be active.
end_time <end_time 32 >– defines the time on which the time range
will stop being active.
weekdays <daylist 32> – defines the days of the week on which the
time range will be active.
<start_year 2011-2029 > – Specifies the time range start year.
<start_mth 1-12> – Specifies the time range start month.
<start_date 1-31> – Specifies the time range start date.
<end_year 2011-2029 > – Specifies the time range end year.
<end _mth 1-12> – Specifies the time range end month.
<end _date 1-31> – Specifies the time range end date.
delete – Delete the time range settings.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the time range on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config time_range dd hours start_time 00:22 end_time

12:34 weekdays tue-fri date from_day year 2012 month 1 date 1 to_day year
2012 month 1 date 3
Command: config time_range dd hours start_time 00:22 end_time 12:34
weekdays tue-fri date from_day year 2012 month 1 date 1 to_day year 2012
month 1 date 3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show time_range
Purpose To display the currently configured access profiles on the Switch.
Syntax show time_range
Description The show time_range command displays the time range
configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

22
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display time range settings on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show time_range

Range name : xxx

Start time : 10:00
End time : 11:00
Days : wed sun

Total Entries : 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

23
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

5
MODIFY BANNER AND PROMPT COMMANDS
The Modify Banner and Prompt commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config
[<string 32> | default | username]
command_prompt
config
{default}
greeting_message
show
greeting_message

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config command_prompt
Purpose To configure the command prompt.
Syntax config command_prompt [<string 32> | default | username]
Description The config command_prompt command configures the command
prompt.
Parameters <string 32> – The command prompt can be changed by entering a
new name of no more that 32 characters.
default – The command prompt will reset to factory default command
prompt. Default = the name of the Switch model, for example “DGS-
1100-10/ME”.
username – The command prompt will be changed to the login
username.
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. Other
restrictions include:
If the “reset” command is executed, the modified command prompt
will remain modified. However, the “reset config/reset system”
command will reset the command prompt to the original factory
banner.
Example usage:
To modify the command prompt to “AtYourService”:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config command_prompt AtYourService

Command: config command_prompt AtYourService

Success!
AtYourService:5#

24
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config greeting_message
Purpose Used to configure the login banner (greeting message).
Syntax config greeting_message {default}
Description The config greeting_message command to modify the login
banner (greeting message).
Parameters default – If the user enters default to the modify banner command,
then the banner will be reset to the original factory banner.
To open the Banner Editor, click Enter after typing the config
greeting_message command. Type the information to be displayed
on the banner by using the commands described on the Banner
Editor:
Quit without save: Ctrl+C
Save and quit: Ctrl+W
Move cursor: Left/Right/Up/Down
Delete line: Ctrl+D
Erase all setting: Ctrl+X
Reload original setting: Ctrl+L
Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. Other
restrictions include:
If the “reset” command is executed, the modified banner will remain
modified. However, the “reset config/reset system” command will
reset the modified banner to the original factory banner.
The capacity of the banner is 6*80. 6 Lines and 80 characters per
line.
Ctrl+W will only save the modified banner in the DRAM. Users need
to type the “save config/save all” command to save it into Flash.
Only valid in threshold level.

Example usage:
To the banner:DGS-1100-10/ME:5>
Command: config greeting_message

Greeting Messages Editor

===========================================================

DGS-1100-10/ME Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Command Line Interface

Copyright(C) 2012 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.

============================================================

<Function Key> <Control Key>

Ctrl+C Quit without save left/right/
Ctrl+W Save and quit up/down Move cursor
Ctrl+D Delete line
Ctrl+X Erase all setting
Ctrl+L Reload original setting

25
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show greeting_message
Purpose Used to view the currently configured greeting message configured
on the Switch.
Syntax show greeting_message
Description The show greeting_message command is used to view the
currently configured greeting message on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the currently configured greeting message:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show greeting_message
Command: show greeting_message

DGS-1100-10/ME Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Command Line Interface

Copyright(C) 2012 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

26
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

6
SWITCH PORT COMMANDS
The Switch Port commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
[all | <portlist 1-10>] medium_type [copper | fiber] MDI/MDIX [MDI | MDIX | auto]
{description <desc 32> | clear_description| flow_control [enable | disable] |
config ports
learning [enable | disable] | state [enable | disable] | speed [auto | 1000_full |
100_full | 100_half | 10_full | 10_half]}
show ports {<portlist 1-10> | all} {description | err_disabled}
show duld ports {all | <portlist 1-10>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config ports
Purpose To configure the Switch’s Ethernet port settings.
Syntax config ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] medium_type [copper | fiber]
MDI/MDIX [MDI | MDIX | auto] {description <desc 32> |
clear_description| flow_control [enable | disable] | learning
[enable | disable] | state [enable | disable] | speed [auto |
1000_full | 100_full | 100_half | 10_full | 10_half]}
Description The config ports command configures the Switch’s Ethernet port
settings. Only the ports listed in the <portlist> are affected.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be configured.
all − Configures all ports on the Switch.
medium_type [copper | fiber] − If configuring the Combo ports, this
defines the type of medium being configured.
MDI/MDIX [MDI | MDIX | j auto] − Specifies the MDI or MDIX setting
of the port. The MDIX setting can be auto, normal or cross.
If set to normal state, the port in MDIX mode, can be connected to
PC NIC using a straight cable. If set to cross state, the port in mdi
mode, can be connected to a port (in mdix mode) on another switch
through a straight cable.
description <desc 32> − Enter and alphanumeric string of no more
that 32 characters to describe a selected port interface.
clear_description – Clear the description for the specified ports.
flow_control [enable] – Enables flow control for the specified ports.
flow_control [disable] – Disables flow control for the specified ports.
learning [enable | disable] c Enables or disables the MAC address
learning on the specified range of ports.
state [enable | disable] − Enables or disables the specified range of
ports.
speed – Sets the speed of a port or range of ports, with the addition
of one of the following:

27
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

• auto − Enables auto-negotiation for the specified range of

ports.
• [10 | 100 | 1000] − Configures the speed in Mbps for the
specified range of ports.
• [half | full] − Configures the specified range of ports as either
full or half-duplex.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the speed of ports 1-3 to be 100 Mbps, full duplex, learning and state enabled:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config ports 1-3 medium_type copper speed 100_full learning

enable state enable
Command: config ports 1-3 medium_type copper speed 100_full learning enable
state enable

Success

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ports
Purpose To display the current configuration of a range of ports.
Syntax show ports {<portlist 1-10> | all} {description | err_disabled}
Description The show ports command displays the current configuration of a
port or range of ports.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports whose settings are to be
displayed.
all – Specifies all ports to be displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the configuration of port 3 on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ports 3

Command: show ports 3

Port State/ Settings Connection Address

Type MDI Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Learning
----- ------ ---- -------------------------------- -------------------------------- ------------
3 Enabled 100M/Full/Enabled Link Down Enabled
MDI

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

28
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show duld ports

Purpose To display the Switch’s Ethernet duld port settings.
Syntax show duld ports {all | <portlist>}
Description The show duld ports command displays the Switch’s Ethernet duld
port settings.
Parameters {all | <portlist>} − Specifies all ports or range of ports to be
displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the Switch’s Ethernet duld ports 1-5 settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show duld ports 1-5

Command: show duld ports 1-5

port Admin State Oper Status Mode Link Status Discovery Time(Sec)
----- ----------------- ---------------- -------- ----------------- ----------------------------
1 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
2 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
3 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
4 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
5 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
6 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

29
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

7
LOOPBACK DETECTION COMMANDS
The Loopback Detection commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable loopdetect
disable loopdetect
config loopdetect mode [portbase | vlanbase]
config loopdetect ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] [enable | disable]
config loopdetect interval_time <value 1-32767> lbd_recover_time [0 | <value 60-1000000>]
show loopdetect {ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable loopdetect
Purpose To enable the loop back detection on the Switch.
Syntax enable loopdetect
Description The enable loopdetect command enables the loop back detection
on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the loopback detection feature on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable loopdetect
Command: enable loopdetect

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable loopdetect
Purpose To disable the loop back detection on the Switch.
Syntax disable loopdetect
Description The disable loopdetect command disables the loop back detection
on the Switch.
Parameters None.

30
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the loopback detection feature on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable loopdetect
Command: disable loopdetect

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config loopdetect mode

Purpose To configure the loop back detection mode to be either portbase or
vlanbase on the Switch.
Syntax config loopdetect mode [portbase | vlanbase]
Description The config loopdetect mode command configures loop back
detection mode to be portbase or vlanbase on the Switch.
Parameters [portbase | vlanbase]] - Specifies the loopdetect mode to be
portbase or vlanbase.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the loopback detection mode to be portabse on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config loopdetect mode portbase

Command: config loopdetect mode portbase

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config loopdetect ports

Purpose To configure loop back detection to be enabled or disabled for the
specific ports on the Switch.
Syntax config loopdetect ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] [enable | disable]
Description The config loopdetect ports command configures the loop back
detection to be enabled or disabled for the specific ports on the
Switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be configured.
all − All ports settings are to be configured.
[enabled | disabled] − Specifies whether loop back detection is
enabled or disabled for the specified ports on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the loop back detection on the Switch:
31
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config loopdetect ports all enable

Command: config loopdetect ports all enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config loopdetect
Purpose To configure the loop back detection interval time and recover time
on the Switch.
Syntax config loopdetect interval_time <value 1-32767>
lbd_recover_time [0 | <value 60-1000000>]
Description The config loopdetect command configures the loop back
detection interval time and recover time on the Switch.
Parameters interval_time <value 1-32767> − Specifies the interval time of loop
back detection. The range is between 1 and 32767 seconds.
lbd_recover_time [0 | <value 60-10000>] − Specifies the recovery
time of loop back detection on the switch. The range is between 60
and 10000 seconds.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the loop back detection with interval time 500 on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config loopdetect interval_time 500

Command: config loopdetect interval_time 500

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show loopdetect
Purpose To display loop back detection information on the Switch.
Syntax show loopdetect {ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]}
Description The show loopdetect command displays the loop back detection
information on the Switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be displayed.
all − All ports settings are to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the loop back detection information on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show loopdetect
Command: show loopdetect

32
DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Loopdetect Global Settings

--------------------------------------
Loopdetect Status : Enabled
Loopdetect Mode : Port-Base
Loopdetect Interval : 100
Recover Time : 60
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

33
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

8
PPPOE CIRCUIT ID INSERTION COMMANDS
PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion is used to produce the unique subscriber mapping capability that is possible on ATM
networks between ATM-DSL local loop and the PPPoE server. The PPPoE server will use the inserted Circuit
Identifier sub-tag of the received packet to provide AAA services (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting).
Through this method, Ethernet networks can the alternative to ATM networks.
The PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config pppoe circuit_id
[enable | disable]
_insertion state
config pppoe
[all | <portlist 1-10>] [ circuit_id [ mac | ip | udf <string 32> ] | state [enable |
circuit_id_insertion
disable ] ]
ports
show pppoe
circuit_id_insertion
show pppoe
circuit_id_insertion {<portlist>}
ports

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state

Purpose Used to enable or disable the PPPoE circuit identifier insertion.
Syntax config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state [enable | disable]
Description When PPPoE circuit identifier insertion is enabled, and the tag is
absent, the system will insert the circuit ID tag to the received
PPPoE discover and request packet. It will then remove the circuit
ID tag from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation
packet.
The inserted circuit ID contains the following information:
Client MAC address
Device ID
Port number
By default, the Switch IP address is used as the device ID to encode
the circuit ID option.
Parameters [enable | disable] – Enables or disables PPPoE circuit ID insertion
globally. The function is disabled by default.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To globally enable PPPoE circuit identifier insertion:

34
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable

Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports

Purpose Used to enable and disable PPPoE circuit identifier insertion on a
per port basis and specify how to encode the circuit ID option.
Syntax config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports [all | <portlist 1-10>]
[ circuit_id [ mac | ip | udf <string 32> ] | state [enable |
disable ] ]
Description When the port’s state and the global state are enabled and if the
TAG is absent, the system will then insert the Circuit ID TAG to the
received PPPoE discovery initiation and request packet. It will then
remove the Circuit ID tag, inserted by the system, from the received
PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a list of ports or all ports to be
configured.
The default settings are enabled for ID insertion per port, but
disabled globally.
circuit_id – Configures the device ID used for encoding of the circuit
ID option.
mac – Specifies that the Switch MAC address will be used to encode
the circuit ID option.
ip – Specifies that the Switch IP address will be used to encode the
circuit ID option.
udf – A user defined string to be used to encode the circuit ID option.
The maximum length is 32.
The default encoding for the device ID option is the Switch IP
address.
state – Specify to either enable or disable PPPoE circuit ID insertion
for the ports listed.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable port 1~5 PPPoE circuit ID insertion function and use Host MAC:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 1-5 circuit_id

mac state enable
Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 1-5 circuit_id mac
state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

35
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show pppoe circuit_id_insertion

Purpose Used to display the PPPoE circuit identifier insertion status for the
Switch.
Syntax show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Description The show pppoe circuit_id_insertion command is used to display
the global state configuration of the PPPoE circuit ID insertion
function.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the global PPPoE ID insertion state:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show pppoe circuit_id_insertion

Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion

Status: Enabled
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports

Purpose Used to display the PPPoE ID insertion configuration on a per
port basis.
Syntax show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports {all | <portlist 1-10>}
Description The show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports command allows
the user to view the configuration of PPPoE ID insertion for each
port.
Parameters {all | <portlist 1-10>} - Specifies which ports to display. If no
ports are specified, every port’s configuration will be listed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the PPPoE circuit ID configuration for ports 2 to 5:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 2-5

Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 2-5

Port State Cirucit ID

---- -------- -------------------------------------
2 Enabled Switch MAC
3 Enabled Switch MAC
4 Enabled Switch MAC
5 Enabled Switch MAC
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

36
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

9
NETWORK MANAGEMENT (SNMP) COMMANDS
The Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1, 2c, and 3. Users can specify
which version of the SNMP users want to use to monitor and control the Switch. The three versions of SNMP,
vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device. The following
table lists the security features of the three SNMP versions.

SNMP Version Authentication Method Description

v1 Community String Community String is used for authentication - NoAuthNoPriv

v2c Community String Community String is used for authentication - NoAuthNoPriv
v3 Username Username is used for authentication – NoAuthNoPriv
v3 MD5 or SHA Authentication is based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
algorithms – AuthNoPriv
v3 MD5 DES or SHA DES Authentication is based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
algorithms – AuthPriv. DES 56-bit encryption is added based
on the CBC-DES(DES-56) standard

The Network Management commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
<username 32> <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [MD5 <auth_password 32> |
create snmp user
SHA <auth_password 32> | none ] [DES <priv_password 32> | none]]
delete snmp user <username 32> [v1 | v2c | v3]

show snmp user

create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid 32> <oid_mask 32 view_type [included | excluded]
delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid 32>]
show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
create snmp community <community_string 32> <username 32>
delete snmp community <community_string 32>
show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 64>
<groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv |
create snmp group auth_priv]{notify_view <view_name 32>}] {read_view <view_name 32> |
write_view <view_name 32>}
delete snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3] [auth_nopriv | auth_priv | noauth_priv]

show snmp groups

show snmp global state

create snmp host <ipaddr> [v1 <username 32> | v2c <username 32> | v3 [noauth_nopriv |
37
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command Parameter
auth_nopriv | auth_priv] <username 32>]
delete snmp host <ipaddr>
show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
<ip6_addr> [v1 <username 32> | v2c <username 32> | v3 [noauth_nopriv |
create snmp v6host
auth_nopriv | auth_priv] <username 32>]
delete snmp v6host <ip6_addr>
show snmp v6host <ip6_addr>

enable snmp traps

disable snmp traps

show snmp traps

enable snmp
authenticate traps
disable snmp
authenticate traps
config syslocation <string 32>
config sysname <string 32>
enable snmp
disable snmp
enable snmp
fiber_port_link traps
disable snmp
fiber_port_link traps
enable snmp LBD traps
disable snmp LBD traps
enable snmp
port_security_violation
traps
disable snmp
port_security_violation
traps
enable snmp
twistedpair_port_link
traps
disable snmp
twistedpair_port_link
traps

38
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create snmp user

Purpose To create a new SNMP user and add that user to an SNMP group.
Syntax create snmp user <username 32> <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3
[MD5 <auth_password 32> | SHA <auth_password 32> | none ]
[DES <priv_password 32> | none]]
Description The create snmp user command creates a new SNMP user and
adds that user to an existing SNMP group.
Parameters <username 32> − The new SNMP username, up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
<groupname 32> − The SNMP group name the new SNMP user is
associated with, has up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
auth - The user may also choose the type of authentication
algorithms that are used to authenticate the snmp user. The choices
are:
• MD5 − Specifies that the HMAC-MD5-96 authentication
level to be used. md5 may be utilized by entering one of the
following:
• <auth password 32> - A string of between 1 and 32
alphanumeric characters used to authorize the agent to
receive packets for the host.
• SHA − Specifies that the HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level
will be used.
• <priv_password 32> - A string of between 1 and 32
alphanumeric characters used to authorize the agent to
receive packets for the host.
• DES − Specifies that the DES authentication level will be
used.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create an SNMP user on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp user dlink SW22 v3 MD5 1234 DES jklj22

Command: create snmp user dlink SW22 v3 MD5 1234 DES jklj22

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp user

Purpose To remove an SNMP user from an SNMP group and also to delete
the associated SNMP group.
Syntax delete snmp user <username 32> [v1 | v2c | v3]
Description The delete snmp user command removes an SNMP user from its
SNMP group and then deletes the associated SNMP group.
Parameters <username 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that

39
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

identifies the SNMP user to be deleted.

Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a previously created SNMP user on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete snmp user dlink v3

Command: delete snmp user dlink v3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp user

Purpose To display information about each SNMP username in the SNMP
group username table.
Syntax show snmp user
Description The show snmp user command displays information about each
SNMP username in the SNMP group username table.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the SNMP users currently configured on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp user

Command: show snmp user

Username Group Name SNMP Version Auth-Protocol PrivProtocol

-------------- ---------------- ---------------- -------------------- ---------------

ReadOnly ReadOnly V1 None None

ReadOnly ReadOnly V2 None None
ReadWrite ReadWrite V1 None None
ReadWrite ReadWrite V2 None None

Total Entries: 4

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create snmp view

Purpose To assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an
SNMP manager can access.
Syntax create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid 32> <oid_mask 32
view_type [included | excluded]

40
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The create snmp view command assigns views to community

strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP manager can access.
Parameters <view_name 32> − A string of up to 30 alphanumeric characters that
identifies the SNMP view to be created.
<oid 32> − The object ID that identifies an object tree (MIB tree) to
be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager.
<oid_mask 32> − The object ID mask that identifies an object tree
(MIB tree) to be included or excluded from access by an SNMP
manager.
included − Includes this object in the list of objects that an SNMP
manager can access.
excluded − Excludes this object from the list of objects that an
SNMP manager can access.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create an SNMP view:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp view dlink 1.3.6 1.1.1 view_type excluded

Command: create snmp view dlink 1.3.6 1.1.1 view_type excluded

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp view

Purpose To remove an SNMP view entry previously created on the Switch.
Syntax delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid 32>]
Description The delete snmp view command removes an SNMP view
previously created on the Switch.
Parameters <view_name 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that
identifies the SNMP view to be deleted.
[all | <oid 32>] − The object ID that identifies an object tree (MIB
tree) that is deleted from the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete all configured SNMP view from the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> delete snmp view dlink all

Command: delete snmp view dlink all

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

41
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show snmp view

Purpose To display an SNMP view previously created on the Switch.
Syntax show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
Description The show snmp view command displays an SNMP view previously
created on the Switch.
Parameters <view_name 32> − A string of up to 30 alphanumeric characters that
identifies the SNMP view to be displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display SNMP view configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp view

Command: show snmp view

SNMP View Table Configuration

View Name Subtree OID OID Mask View Type
------------ ---------------------- ---------------------- ----------------
dlink 1.2.3.4 1.1.1.1 Excluded
ReadWrite 1 1 Included

Total Entries: 2

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create snmp community

Purpose To create an SNMP community string to define the relationship
between the SNMP manager and an SNMP agent.
Syntax create snmp community <community_string 32> <username
32>
Description The create snmp community command creates an SNMP
community string and assigns access-limiting characteristics to this
community string. The community string acts like a password to
permit access to the agent on the Switch. One or more of the
following characteristics can be associated with the community
string:
An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are
permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
A MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects to be
accessible to the SNMP community.
Read/write or read-only level permission for the MIB objects
accessible to the SNMP community.
Parameters <community_string 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric
characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community.
This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers
access to MIB objects in the Switch’s SNMP agent.
<username 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that

42
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP

manager is allowed to access on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create the SNMP community string ‘dlink:’

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp community dlinkgroup dlink

Command: create snmp community dlinkgroup dlink

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp community

Purpose To remove a specific SNMP community string from the Switch.
Syntax delete snmp community <community_string 32>
Description The delete snmp community command removes a previously
defined SNMP community string from the Switch.
Parameters <community_string 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric
characters that is used to identify which members of an SNMP
community to delete. This string is used like a password to give
remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the SNMP community string ‘dlinkgroup’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete snmp community dlinkgroup

Command: delete snmp community dlinkgroup

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp community

Purpose To display SNMP community strings configured on the Switch.
Syntax show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
Description The show snmp community command displays SNMP community
strings that are configured on the Switch.
Parameters <community_string 32> − A string of up to 20 alphanumeric
characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community.
This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers
access to MIB objects in the Switch’s SNMP agent.

43
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the currently entered SNMP community strings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show snmp community

Command: show snmp community

SNMP Community Table

(Maximum Entries : 10)
Community Name User Name
--------------- ----------
private ReadWrite
public ReadOnly

Total Entries: 2

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config snmp engineID

Purpose To configure a name for the SNMP engine on the Switch.
Syntax config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 64>
Description The config snmp engineID command configures a name for the
SNMP engine on the Switch.
Parameters <snmp_engineID 64> − A string, of between 10 and 64
alphanumeric characters, to be used to identify the SNMP engine on
the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To give the SNMP agent on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config snmp engineID 12345678900

Command: config snmp engineID 12345678900

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create snmp group

Purpose To create a new SNMP group, or a table that maps SNMP users to
SNMP views.
Syntax create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3
[noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]{notify_view
<view_name 32>}] {read_view <view_name 32> | write_view

44
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

<view_name 32>}
Description The create snmp group command creates a new SNMP group, or
a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views.
Parameters <groupname 32> − A name of up to 30 alphanumeric characters that
identifies the SNMP group the new SNMP user is to be associated
with.
v1 – Specifies that SNMP version 1 is to be used. The Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), version 1, is a network
management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control
network devices.
v2c – Specifies that SNMP version 2c is to be used. The SNMP v2c
supports both centralized and distributed network management
strategies. It includes improvements in the Structure of Management
Information (SMI) and adds some security features.
v3 – Specifies that the SNMP version 3 is to be used. SNMP v3
provides secure access to devices through a combination of
authentication and encrypting packets over the network. SNMP v3
adds:
• Message integrity − Ensures that packets have not been
tampered with during transit.
• Authentication − Determines if an SNMP message is from a
valid source.
• Encryption − Scrambles the contents of messages to
prevent it from being viewed by an unauthorized source.
noauth_nopriv − Specifies that there is no authorization and no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_nopriv − Specifies that authorization is required, but there is no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_priv − Specifies that authorization is required, and that packets
sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger are
encrypted.
read_view – Specifies that the SNMP group being created can
request SNMP messages.
• <view_name 32> − A string of up to 32 objects that a remote
SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch.
write_view – Specifies that the SNMP group being created has write
privileges.
• <view_name 32 identifies the group of MIB objects that a
remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch.
notify_view − Specifies that the SNMP group being created can
receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch’s SNMP
agent.
• <view_name 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric
characters that identifies the group of MIB objects that a
remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

45
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To create an SNMP group named ‘sg1:’

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp group sg1 v2c read_view sg1

write_view sg1 notify_view sg1
Command: create snmp group sg1 v2c read_view sg1 write_view
sg1 notify_view sg1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp group

Purpose To remove an SNMP group from the Switch.
Syntax delete snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [auth_priv |
noauth_nopriv]]
Description The delete snmp group command removes an SNMP group from
the Switch.
Parameters <groupname 32> − A string of that identifies the SNMP group the
new SNMP user will be associated with up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
Restrictions Only administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the SNMP group named ‘sg1’:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> delete snmp group sg1 v2c
Command: delete snmp group sg1 v2c

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp groups

Purpose To display the group-names of SNMP groups currently configured
on the Switch. The security model, level, and status of each group
are also displayed.
Syntax show snmp groups
Description The show snmp groups command displays the group-names of
SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch. The security
model, level, and status of each group are also displayed.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

46
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display the currently configured SNMP groups on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp groups

Command: show snmp groups

SNMP Group Table

(Maximum Entries : 10)

Group Name Read View Write View Notify View Security Model Security Level
------------------ -------------- ---------------- --------------- ---------------------- -----------------
sg1 df df d v3 AuthPriv
ReadOnly ReadWrite --- ReadWrite v1 NoAuthNoPriv
ReadOnly ReadWrite --- ReadWrite v2c NoAuthNoPriv
ReadWrite ReadWrite ReadWrite ReadWrite v1 NoAuthNoPriv
ReadWrite ReadWrite ReadWrite ReadWrite v2c NoAuthNoPriv

Total Entries: 5

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp global state

Purpose To display the global state of SNMP currently configured on the
Switch.
Syntax show snmp global state
Description The show snmp global state command displays the global state of
SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the currently configured SNMP global state on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp global state

Command: show snmp global state

SNMP Global State : Enable

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create snmp host

Purpose To create a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Syntax create snmp host <ipaddr> [v1 <username 32> | v2c <username

47
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

32> | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv] <username

32>]
Description The create snmp host command creates a recipient of SNMP traps
generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Parameters <ipaddr> − The IP address of the remote management station to
serve as the SNMP host for the Switch.
v1 – Specifies that SNMP version 1 is to be used. The Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), version 1, is a network
management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control
network devices.
v2c – Specifies that SNMP version 2c is to be used. The SNMP v2c
supports both centralized and distributed network management
strategies. It includes improvements in the Structure of Management
Information (SMI) and adds some security features.
v3 – Specifies that the SNMP version 3 is to be used. SNMP v3
provides secure access to devices through a combination of
authentication and encrypting packets over the network. SNMP v3
adds:
• Message integrity − ensures that packets have not been
tampered with during transit.
• Authentication − determines if an SNMP message is from a
valid source.
• Encryption − scrambles the contents of messages to prevent
it being viewed by an unauthorized source.
<username 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that
identifies user names of an SNMP community. This string is used
like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB
objects in the Switch’s SNMP agent.
noauth_nopriv − Specifies that there is no authorization and no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_nopriv − Specifies that authorization is required, but there is no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_priv − Specifies that authorization is required, and that packets
sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger are
encrypted.
Restrictions Only Administrator and operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To create an SNMP host to receive SNMP messages:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp host 10.90.90.22 v3 noauth_nopriv dlink

Command: create snmp host 10.90.90.22 v3 noauth_nopriv dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp host

Purpose To remove a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s

48
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

SNMP agent.
Syntax delete snmp host <ipaddr>
Description The delete snmp host command deletes a recipient of SNMP traps
generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Parameters <ipaddr> − The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that
receives SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To delete an SNMP host entry:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete snmp host 10.90.90.22

Command: delete snmp host 10.90.90.22

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp host

Purpose To display the recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Syntax show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
Description The show snmp host command is used to display the IP addresses
and configuration information of remote SNMP managers that are
designated as recipients of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Parameters <ipaddr> − The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that
receives SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the currently configured SNMP hosts on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp host

Command: show snmp host

SNMP Host Table

(Maximum Entries : 10)

Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name

------------------------ --------------------- -------------------------------------------------------
10.90.90.22 V3-NoAuthNoPriv dlink

Total Entries : 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

49
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

create snmp v6host

Purpose To create a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Syntax create snmp v6host <ip6_addr> [v1 <username 32> | v2c
<username 32> | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]
<username 32>]
Description The create snmp v6host command creates a recipient of SNMP
traps generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Parameters <ipv6_addr> − The IPv6 address of the remote management station
to serve as the SNMP host for the Switch.
v1 – Specifies that SNMP version 1 is to be used. The Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), version 1, is a network
management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control
network devices.
v2c – Specifies that SNMP version 2c is to be used. The SNMP v2c
supports both centralized and distributed network management
strategies. It includes improvements in the Structure of Management
Information (SMI) and adds some security features.
v3 – Specifies that the SNMP version 3 is to be used. SNMP v3
provides secure access to devices through a combination of
authentication and encrypting packets over the network. SNMP v3
adds:
• Message integrity − ensures that packets have not been
tampered with during transit.
• Authentication − determines if an SNMP message is from a
valid source.
• Encryption − scrambles the contents of messages to prevent
it being viewed by an unauthorized source.
<username 32> − A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that
identifies user name of an SNMP community. This string is used like
a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects
in the Switch’s SNMP agent.
noauth_nopriv − Specifies that there is no authorization and no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_nopriv − Specifies that authorization is required, but there is no
encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP
manager.
auth_priv − Specifies that authorization is required, and that packets
sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger are
encrypted.
Restrictions Only Administrator and operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To create an SNMP host to receive SNMP messages:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create snmp v6host 3000::1 v3 noauth_nopriv dlink

Command: create snmp v6host 3000::1 v3 noauth_nopriv dlink

Success!
50
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete snmp v6host

Purpose To remove a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Syntax delete snmp v6host <ip6_addr>
Description The delete snmp host command deletes a recipient of SNMP traps
generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Parameters <ipv6_addr> − The IPv6 address of a remote SNMP manager that
receives SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To delete an SNMP host entry:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete snmp v6host 90.90.22

Command: delete snmp host 10.90.90.22

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp v6host

Purpose To display the recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s
SNMP agent.
Syntax show snmp v6host {<ip6_addr>}
Description The show snmp host command is used to display the IPv6
addresses and configuration information of remote SNMP managers
that are designated as recipients of SNMP traps generated by the
Switch’s SNMP agent.
Parameters <ip6_addr> − The IPv6 address of a remote SNMP manager that
receives SNMP traps generated by the Switch’s SNMP agent.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the currently configured SNMP hosts on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show snmp v6host

Command: show snmp v6host

SNMP Host Table

(Maximum Entries : 10)

Host IP Address SNMP Version Community or User Name

51
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

------------------------------------ -------------------- -------------------------------------

3000::1 V3-NoAuthNoPriv dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp traps

Purpose To enable SNMP trap support.
Syntax enable snmp traps
Description The enable snmp traps command enables SNMP trap support on
the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To enable SNMP trap support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp traps

Command: enable snmp traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp traps

Purpose To disable SNMP trap support on the Switch.
Syntax disable snmp traps
Description The disable snmp traps command disables SNMP trap support on
the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp traps

Command: disable snmp traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show snmp traps

Purpose To display SNMP trap support status on the Switch.

52
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Syntax show snmp traps

Description The show snmp traps command displays the SNMP trap support
status currently configured on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the current SNMP trap support:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show snmp traps

Command: show snmp traps

SNMP Traps : Disabled

SNMP Authentication Traps : Disabled
Coldstart Traps : Disabled
Warmstart Traps : Disabled
Firmware Upgrade Traps : Disabled
Port Security violation Traps : Disabled
Loopback detection Traps : Disabled
Duplicate IP Detected Traps : Disabled
Fiber Port Link Up/Down Traps : Disabled
Twisted Pair Port Link Up/Down Traps : Disabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp authenticate traps

Purpose To enable SNMP authentication trap support.
Syntax enable snmp authenticate traps
Description The enable snmp authenticate traps command enables SNMP
authentication trap support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To turn on SNMP authentication trap support:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp authenticate traps

Command: enable snmp authenticate traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

53
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

disable snmp authenticate traps

Purpose To disable SNMP authentication trap support.
Syntax disable snmp authenticate traps
Description The disable snmp authenticate traps command disables SNMP
authentication trap support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To disable the SNMP authentication trap support:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp authenticate traps

Command: disable snmp authenticate traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config syslocation
Purpose To enter a description of the location of the Switch.
Syntax config syslocation <string 32>
Description The config syslocation command enters a description of the
location of the Switch. A maximum of 32 characters can be used.
Parameters <string 32> - A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the Switch location for ‘HQ5F’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config syslocation HQ5F

Command: config syslocation HQ5F

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config sysname
Purpose To define the name for the Switch.
Syntax config sysname <string 32>
Description The config sysname command defines the name of the Switch.
Parameters <string 32> - A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

54
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure the Switch name as ‘10ME’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config sysname 10ME

Command: config sysname 10ME

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp
Purpose To enable SNMP support.
Syntax enable snmp
Description The enable snmp command enables SNMP support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable SNMP support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp
Command: enable snmp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp
Purpose To disable SNMP support.
Syntax disable snmp
Description The disable snmp command disables SNMP support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable SNMP support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp
Command: disable snmp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

55
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

enable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Purpose To enable SNMP fiber port link traps support on the Switch.
Syntax enable snmp fiber_port_link traps
Description The enable snmp fiber_port_link traps command enables SNMP
fiber port link traps support on the Switch. After enabling the SNMP
fiber port link traps support, the Switch will send out a trap to the
SNMP manage host when the fiber port is link up or link down.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To enable SNMP fiber port link traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Command: enable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Purpose To disable SNMP fiber port link traps.
Syntax disable snmp fiber_port_link traps
Description The disable snmp fiber_port_link traps command disables SNMP
fiber port link traps support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To disable SNMP fiber port link traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Command: disable snmp fiber_port_link traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp LBD traps

Purpose To enable SNMP LBD traps.
Syntax enable snmp LBD traps
Description The enable snmp LBD traps command enables SNMP LBD traps
support on the Switch.
Parameters None.

56
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable SNMP LBD traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp LBD traps

Command: enable snmp LBD traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp LBD traps

Purpose To disable SNMP LBD traps.
Syntax disable snmp LBD traps
Description The disable snmp LBD traps command disables SNMP LBD traps
support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable SNMP LBD traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp LBD traps

Command: disable snmp LBD traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp port_security_violation traps

Purpose To enable SNMP port security violation traps.
Syntax enable snmp port_security_violation traps
Description The enable snmp port_security_violation traps command
enables SNMP port security violation traps on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable SNMP port security violation traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp port_security_violation traps

Command: enable snmp port_security_violation traps

57
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp port_security_violation traps

Purpose To disable SNMP port security violation traps.
Syntax disable snmp port_security_violation traps
Description The disable snmp port_security_violation traps command
disables SNMP port security violation traps on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable SNMP port security violation traps support on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp port_security_violation traps

Command: disable snmp port_security_violation traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Purpose To enable SNMP twisted pair ports link traps support on the Switch.
Syntax enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps
Description The enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps command enables
SNMP twisted pair ports link traps support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the SNMP twisted pair ports link traps on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Command: enable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Purpose To disable SNMP twisted pair ports link traps support on the Switch.
Syntax disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps
Description The disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps command disables
SNMP twisted pair ports link traps support on the Switch.
Parameters None.
58
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the SNMP twisted pair ports link traps on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Command: disable snmp twistedpair_port_link traps

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

59
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

10
DOWNLOAD/UPLOAD COMMANDS
The Download/Upload commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
[cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>] |
[firmware_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] < path_filename 64>] |
download
[log_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>] | [log_toTFTP
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>]
[[firmware_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>] | [cfg_toTFTP
upload
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>]

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

download
Purpose To download and install a firmware, boot, or switch configuration file
from a TFTP server.
Syntax download [cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>]
<path_filename 64>] | [firmware_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6_addr>] < path_filename 64>] | [log_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>] | [log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6_addr>] <path_filename 64>]
Description The download command downloads a firmware, boot, log or switch
configuration file from a TFTP server.
Parameters cfg_fromTFTP − Downloads a switch configuration file from a TFTP
server.
<ipaddr> − The IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6_addr> − The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> − The DOS path and filename of the switch
configuration file, up to 64 characters, on the TFTP server. For
example, C:\31xx.had.
startup − Indicates the Configuration file is to be downloaded to the
startup config.
firmware_fromTFTP − Downloads and installs firmware on the
Switch from a TFTP server.
< path_filename 64> − The DOS path and filename of the firmware
file or log file, up to 64 characters, on the TFTP server. For example,
C:\31xx.had.
log_fromTFTP − Downloads a log file from a TFTP server.
cfg_toTFTP − Downloads a log file to a TFTP server.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

60
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To download a firmware file:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>download firmware 1.1.1.23 1\dgs_1100-10me.ros

Command: download firmware_fromTFTP 1.1.1.23 1\ dgs_1100-10me.ros
01–Jan–2000 01:19:48 %COPY–I–FILECPY: Files Copy – source URL tftp://1.1.1.23 /1\
dgs_1100-10me.ros destination URL Unit all flash://image
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!01–Jan–2000 01:22:49 %COPY–W–TRAP:
The copy operation was completed successfully
!
3920460 bytes copied in 00:03:01 [hh:mm:ss]

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

To download a configuration file:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>download cfg_fromTFTP 10.48.74.121 c:\cfg\setting.txt

Overwrite file [startup-config] ?[Yes/press any key for no]....
01-Jan-200003:19:46%COPY-I-FILECPY:FilesCopy-source URL tftp://10.48.74.121/1.txt
destination
URL flash://startup-config
Success!

Success!

.....01-Jan-2000 03:18:40 %COPY-N-TRAP: The copy operation was completed

successfully!
Copy: 267 bytes copied in 00:00:08 [hh:mm:ss]
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

upload
Purpose To upload the current switch settings to a TFTP server.
Syntax upload [[firmware_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>]
<path_filename 64>] | [cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr>]
<path_filename 64>
Description The upload command uploads the Switch’s current settings to a
TFTP server.

61
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters firmware_toTFTP − Specifies that the Switch’s current firmware are

to be uploaded to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> − The IPv4 address of the TFTP server. The TFTP server
must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch.
<ipv6_addr> − The IPv6 address of the TFTP server. The TFTP
server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch.
<path_filename 64> − The location of the Switch configuration file on
the TFTP server.
cfg_fromTFTP − Uploads a switch configuration file from a TFTP
server.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>upload cfg_toTFTP 1.1.1.23 dgs_1100-10me.ros
Command: upload log_toTFTP 1.1.1.23 dgs_1100-10me.ros
01–Jan–2000 01:26:11 %COPY–I–FILECPY: Files Copy – source
URL running–config destination URL tftp://1.1.1.23/1\running–
config
… ..01–Jan–2000 01:26:16 %COPY–W–TRAP: The copy operation
was completed success fully!
158 bytes copied in 00:00:05 [hh:mm:ss]

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

62
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

11
DHCP RELAY COMMANDS
The DHCP Relay commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable dhcp_relay
disable dhcp_relay
config dhcp_relay add
<ipaddr>
ipif system
config dhcp_relay
<ipaddr>
delete ipif system
config dhcp_relay
<value 1-16>
hops
config dhcp_relay [check [enable | disable] | policy [drop | keep | replace] | remote_id [default |
option_82 user_define <string 32>] | state [enable | disable]]
show dhcp_relay {ipif}
enable
dhcp_local_relay
disable
dhcp_local_relay
config dhcp_local_relay vlan [<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist>] state[enable | disable]
show dhcp_local_relay
enable dhcpv6_relay
disable dhcpv6_relay
show dhcpv6_relay {ipif system}
config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif System <ipv6_addr>
config dhcpv6_relay
<value 1-32>
hop_count
Config dhcpv6_relay [state [enable | disable]| check ] [enable | disable] | remote_id [default |
option_37 cid_with_user_define <string 128> | user_define <string 128>]]

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable dhcp_relay
Purpose To enable DHCP Relay server on the Switch
Syntax enable dhcp_relay
Description The enable dhcp_relay command sets the DHCP Relay to be
globally enabled on the Switch and on all existing VLANs.

63
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable DHCP Relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable dhcp_relay
Command: enable dhcp_relay

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable dhcp_relay
Purpose To disable DHCP Relay server on the Switch
Syntax disable dhcp_relay
Description The disable dhcp_relay command sets the DHCP Relay to be
globally disabled on the Switch and on all existing VLANs.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable DHCP Relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable dhcp_relay
Command: disable dhcp_relay

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcp_relay add ipif System

Purpose To define a DHCP server as a DHCP Relay server
Syntax config dhcp_relay add ipif System <ipaddr>
Description The config dhcp_relay add ipif System command adds DHCP
servers as DHCP Relay servers.
Parameters <ipaddr> − The IP address of the DHCP server. Up to 4 servers can
be defined.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add a DHCP server as a DHCP Relay server:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.6.150.49

Command: config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.6.150.49
64
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcp_relay delete ipif System

Purpose To delete a DHCP server from the DHCP Relay server list.
Syntax config dhcp_relay delete ipif System <ipaddr>
Description The config dhcp_relay delete ipif System command deletes a
DHCP server defined as a DHCP Relay server.
Parameters <ipaddr> − The IP address of the DHCP server.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To remove a DHCP server from the DHCP Relay server list:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.6.150.49

Command: config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.6.150.49

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcp_relay hops

Purpose To delete a DHCP server from the DHCP Relay server list.
Syntax config dhcp_relay hops <value 1-16>
Description The config dhcp_relay hops command configures the
DHCP/BOOTP relay feature.
Parameters <value 1-16> − Specifies the maximum number of relay agent hops
that the DHCP packets can cross.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the DHCP relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcp_relay hops 12

Command: config dhcp_relay hops 12

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

65
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config dhcp_relay option_82

Purpose To configure the check, policy, and state of the DHCP relay agent
information option 82 field of the Switch.
Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 [check [enable | disable] | policy
[drop | keep | replace] | remote_id [default | user_define <string
32>] | state [enable | disable]]
Description The config dhcp_relay option_82 is used to configure the check,
policy and state of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the
Switch
Parameters check: used to configure the check of DHCP relay agent information
option 82 of the Switch.
enable – When the field is toggled to enable, the relay agent will
check the validity of the packet’s option 82 field. If the switch
receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP
client, the switch drops the packet because it is invalid. In packets
received from DHCP servers, the relay agent will drop invalid
messages.
disable – When the field is toggled to disable, the relay agent will not
check the validity of the packet’s option 82 field.

policy: used to configure the re-forwarding policy of DHCP relay

agent information option 82 of the Switch.
replace − The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field
already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client.
drop − The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already
exists in the packet received from the DHCP client.
keep − The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field
already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client.

state: used to configure the state of DHCP relay agent information

option 82 of the Switch.
enable − When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will
insert and remove DHCP relay information (option 82 field) in
messages between DHCP server and client. When the relay agent
receives the DHCP request, it adds the option 82 information, and
the IP address of the relay agent (if the relay agent is configured), to
the packet. Once the option 82 field information has been added to
the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server. When the DHCP server
receives the packet, if the server is capable of option 82, it can
implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that
can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID. Then the DHCP
server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply. The DHCP
server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request
was relayed to the server by the relay agent. The switch verifies that
it originally inserted the option 82 data. Finally, the relay agent
removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch
port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request.
disable − If the field is toggled to disable the relay agent will not
insert and remove DHCP relay information (option 82 field) in
messages between DHCP servers and clients, and the check and
policy settings will have no effect.

Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

66
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To disable the DHCP relay option 82 on the Switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcp_relay option_82 state disable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 state disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show dhcp_relay
Purpose To display the DHCP Relay settings on the Switch.
Syntax show dhcp_relay {ipif}
Description The show dhcp_relay command displays the DHCP Relay status
and list of servers defined as DHCP Relay servers on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display DHCP Relay settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show dhcp_relay

Command: show dhcp_relay

DHCP Relay Status : Enabled

DHCP Relay Hops Count Limit :4
DHCP Relay Time Threshold :0
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option82 State : Enabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option82 Check : Enabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option82 Policy : replace
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option82 Remote ID : string
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable dhcp_local_relay
Purpose To enable the DHCP local relay feature globally
Syntax enable dhcp_local_relay
Description The enable dhcp_local_relay command enables the DHCP local
relay feature on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the DHCP Local Relay:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable dhcp_local_relay
Command: enable dhcp_local_relay

67
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable dhcp_local_relay
Purpose To disable the DHCP local relay feature globally
Syntax disable dhcp_local_relay
Description The disable dhcp_local_relay command disables the DHCP local
relay feature on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the DHCP Local Relay:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable dhcp_local_relay
Command: disable dhcp_local_relay

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcp_local_relay
Purpose To specify which VLAN’s the feature works on.
Syntax config dhcp_local_relay vlan [<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist>]
state[enable | disable]
Description Each VLAN which was added to the DHCP Local Relay list
participates in the DHCP Local Relay process – Option 82 is added
to DHCP requests on this VLAN, and Removed from DHCP Replies
on this VLAN.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> – the VLAN name identifier
vlanid <vidlist> – The VLAN tag identifier
state [enable | disable] – enable or disable the DHCP Local Relay
status by VLAN name or VLAN ID.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the VLAN ID10 from VLAN of DHCP Local Relay:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 10 state disable

Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 10 state disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

68
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show dhcp_local_relay
Purpose To display which VLAN’s the feature works on.
Syntax show dhcp_local_relay
Description Each VLAN which was added to the DHCP Local Relay list
participates in the DHCP Local Relay process – Option 82 is added
to DHCP requests on this VLAN, and Removed from DHCP Replies
on this VLAN.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the DHCP local relay information on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show dhcp_local_relay

Command: show dhcp_local_relay

DHCP Local Relay Status : Disabled

DHCP Local Relay VID List :1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable dhcpv6_relay
Purpose To enable DHCPv6 Relay function on the Switch
Syntax enable dhcpv6_relay
Description The enable dhcpv6_relay command is used to enable the DHCPv6
relay global state on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable DCHPv6 Relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable dhcpc6_relay
Command: enable dhcpc6_relay

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable dhcp6_relay
Purpose To disable DHCPv6 Relay function on the Switch
Syntax disable dhcpv6_relay
Description The disable dhcpv6_relay command is used to disable the
DHCPv6 relay global state on the Switch.
69
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable DHCPv6 Relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable dhcpv6_relay
Command: disable dhcpv6_relay

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show dhcpv6_relay
Purpose To display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration.
Syntax show dhcpv6_relay {ipif system}
Description The show dhcpv6_relay command displays the current DHCPv6
relay configuration for all interfaces, if a IP interface name is
specified, it will display the DHCPv6 relay configuration for that IP
interface.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display DHCPv6 Relay settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show dhcpv6_relay

Command: show dhcpv6_relay

DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled

DHCPv6 Relay Hops Count Limit :4
DHCPv6 Relay Option37 State : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Option37 Check : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Option37 Remote ID : DE-AD-BE-EF-01-02
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcpv6_relay
Purpose Used to add or delete a destination IP address in the switch’s
DHCPv6 relay table.
Syntax config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif System <ipv6_addr>
Description The config dhcpv6_relay command can add or delete an IPv6
destination address used to forward (relay) DHCPv6 packets.
Parameters add − Add an IPv6 destination to the DHCPv6 relay table.
delete − Remove an IPv6 destination to the DHCPv6 relay table.
ipif system − The name of the IP interface in which DHCPv6 relay is

70
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

to be enabled.
<ipv6_addr> − The DHCPv6 server IP address.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add the DHCPv6 relay on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 3000::1

Command: config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 3000::1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcpv6_relay hop_count

Purpose Used to configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count of the switch.
Syntax config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
Description The config dhcpv6_relay hops_count command is used to
configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count of the switch.
Parameters <value 1-32> − The hop count is the number of relay agents that
have to be relayed in this message. The range is 1 to 32. The
default value is 4.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 3

Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dhcpv6_relay option_37

Purpose Used to configure the DHCPv6 relay option 37 of the switch.
Syntax config dhcpv6_relay option_37 [state [enable | disable]| check ]
[enable | disable] | remote_id [default | cid_with_user_define
<string 128> | user_define <string 128>]]
Description The config dhcpv6_relay hops_count command is used to
configure the DHCPv6 Relay option 37 function.When DHCPv6
relay option 37 is enabled, the DHCP packet is inserted with the
option 37 field before being relayed to the server. The DHCP packet
will be processed based on the behavior defined in the check and
remote ID type setting. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet
is relayed directly to the server.
Parameters state [enable | disable] - Specify DHCPv6 relay option37 state.

71
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet is inserted with the
option 37 field before being relayed to the server. When the state is
disabled, the DHCP packet is relayed directly to the server.
check [enable | disable] - Specify to check the packets or not. When
the check state is enabled, packets from client side should not have
the option 37 field. If client originating packets have the option 37
field, they will be dropped. Specify for not checking the packets.
remote_id [default | cid_with_user_define <string 128> | user_define
<string 128>] - Specify the content in the remote ID.
default – Specify to have the remote ID as VLAN ID + Module + Port
+System MAC address of the device.
cid_with_user_define – Specify to have the remote ID as VLAN ID +
Module + Port + user defined string.
user_define – Use the user-defined string as the remote ID.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operate-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 3

Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

72
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

12
NETWORK MONITORING COMMANDS
The Network Monitoring commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
show packet ports <portlist 1-10>
show error ports <portlist 1-10>
show utilization [ports {<portlist>} | cpu | mem]
clear counters ports <porlist 1-10>

clear log

{[index <value 1-500> - <value 1-500>] | severity [debug | informational |

show log
warning ]}
save log

enable syslog

disable syslog

<index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {severity [informational | warning |

create syslog host debug] | facility [local0 | local1| local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] |
state [enable | disable] | udp_port [514 | <udp_port_number 6000-65535>]}
[all | <index 1-4>] {severity [informational | warning | debug] | facility [local0 |
local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | state [enable | disable] |
config syslog host
udp_port [ 514 | <udp_port_number 6000-65535>] | ipaddress [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6addr>]}
delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
cable diagnostic port [<portlist 1-10> | all]

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

show packet ports

Purpose To display statistics for the packets sent and received in frames per
second by the Switch.
Syntax show packet ports <portlist 1-10>
Description The show packet ports command displays statistics about packets
sent and received by ports specified in the port list. The results are
separated into three tables, labeled A, B, and C in the window
below. Table A is relevant to the size of the packets, Table B is
relevant to the type of packets and Table C is relevant to the type of
frame associated with these packets.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports whose statistics are to be

73
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the packets analysis for port 7:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show packet ports

Command: show packet ports

Port Number : 1
Frame Size Frame Counts Frames/sec Frame Type Total Total/sec
---------------- -------------------- ----------------- ----------------- --------- ---------------
64 2161 2 RX Bytes 168377 128
65-127 249 0 RX Frames 2435 2
128-255 18 0
256-511 7 0 TX Bytes 331492 1071
512-1023 0 0 TX Frames 3550 3
1024-1518 0 0

Unicast RX 2158 2
Multicast RX 5 0
Broadcast RX 272 0

CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh

show error ports

Purpose To display the error statistics for a port or a range of ports.
Syntax show error ports <portlist 1-10>
Description The show error ports command displays all of the packet error
statistics collected and logged by the Switch for a given port list.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports whose error statistics are to
be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the errors of port 1:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show errors port 1

Command: show error ports 1

Port Number : 1
RX Frames TX Frames
---------------- -------------------
CRC Error 0 Excessive Deferral 0
Undersize 0 CRC Error 0

74
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Oversize 0 Late Collision 0

Fragment 8 Excessive Collision 0
Jabber 0 Single Collision 0
Drop Pkts 0 Collision 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show utilization
Purpose To display real-time port utilization statistics.
Syntax show utilization [ports {<portlist 1-10>} | cpu | dram]
Description The show utilization command displays the real-time utilization
statistics for ports in bits per second (bps) for the Switch, and for the
CPU in a percentage.
Parameters ports{ – Entering this parameter will display the current port
utilization of the Switch.
<portlist 1-10> – Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
cpu – Entering this parameter will display the current CPU utilization
of the Switch.
dram – Entering this parameter will display the current memory
utilization of the Switch.
Restrictions None.

To display the port 2 utilization statistics:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show utilization ports 2

Command: show utilization ports 2

Port TX/sec RX/sec Util

------ -------- ---------- ----
2 0 0 0

CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

To display the cpu utilization statistics:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show utilization cpu

Command: show utilization cpu
CPU Utilization:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Five Seconds: 2%
One Minute : 2%
Five Minute : 2%

75
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

clear counters
Purpose To clear the Switch’s statistics counters.
Syntax clear counters ports <porlist 1-10>
Description The clear counters command clears the counters used by the
Switch to compile statistics.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – Specifies a range of ports to be cleared.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To clear the counters:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> clear counters ports 2-5

Command: clear counters ports 2-5

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

clear log
Purpose To clear the Switch’s history log.
Syntax clear log
Description The clear log command clears the Switch’s history log.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To clear the log information:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>clear log
Command: clear log

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show log
Purpose To display the Switch history log.
Syntax show log {[index <value 1-500> - <value 1-500>] | severity
[debug | informational | warning ]}
Description The show log command displays the contents of the Switch’s
76
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

history log.
Parameters index <value 1-500> − The number of entries in the history log to
display.
severity [debug | informational | warning] − Specifies the severity
type to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the Switch history log:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show log index 1 - 2

Command: show log index 1 - 2

Index Time Log Text Log Severity

----- -------------------- ------------------------------------------ ------------------
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

save log
Purpose To save the Switch history log.
Syntax save log
Description The save log command saves the contents of the Switch’s history
log.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To save the Switch history log:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> save log

Command: save log

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable syslog
Purpose To enable the system log to be sent to a remote host.
Syntax enable syslog
Description The enable syslog command enables the system log to be sent to a
remote host.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

77
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To enable the syslog function on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable syslog
Command: enable syslog

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable syslog
Purpose To disable the system log from being sent to a remote host.
Syntax disable syslog
Description The disable syslog command disables the system log from being
sent to a remote host.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the syslog function on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable syslog
Command: disable syslog

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create syslog host

Purpose To create a new syslog host.
Syntax create syslog host <index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6addr>] {severity [informational | warning | debug] | facility
[local0 | local1| local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] |
state [enable | disable] | udp_port [514 | <udp_port_number
6000-65535>]}
Description The create syslog host command creates a new syslog host.
Parameters all − Specifies that the command is to be applied to all hosts.
<index 1-4> − The syslog host index id. There are four available
indices, numbered 1 to 4.
ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] − The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the
remote host to which syslog messages are to be sent.
severity − The message severity level indicator. These are
described in the table below (Bold font indicates that the
corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch):

Numerical Severity
Code

78
DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

0 Emergency: system is unusable

1 Alert: action must be taken immediately
2 Critical: critical conditions
3 Error: error conditions
4 Warning: warning conditions
5 Notice: normal but significant condition
6 Informational: informational messages
7 Debug: debug-level messages

informational − Specifies that informational messages are to be sent

to the remote host. This corresponds to number 6 from the list
above.
warning − Specifies that warning messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 4 from the list above.
debug − Specifies that debug message are to be sent to the remote
host.
facility − Some of the operating system daemons and processes
have been assigned facility values. Processes and daemons that
have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the ‘local
use’ facilities or they may use the ‘user-level’ Facility. Those
Facilities that have been designated are shown in the table below
(Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch currently
supports):

Numerical Facility
Code

0 kernel messages
1 user-level messages
2 mail system
3 system daemons
4 security/authorization messages
5 messages generated internally by syslog
6 line printer subsystem
7 network news subsystem
8 UUCP subsystem
9 clock daemon
10 security/authorization messages
11 FTP daemon
12 NTP subsystem
13 log audit
14 log alert
15 clock daemon
16 local use 0 (local0)
17 local use 1 (local1)
18 local use 2 (local2)
19 local use 3 (local3)
20 local use 4 (local4)
21 local use 5 (local5)

79
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

22 local use 6 (local6)

23 local use 7 (local7)

local0 − Specifies that local use 0 messages are to be sent to the

remote host. This corresponds to number 16 from the list above.
local1 − Specifies that local use 1 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 17 from the list above.
local2 − Specifies that local use 2 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 18 from the list above.
local3 − Specifies that local use 3 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 19 from the list above.
local4 − Specifies that local use 4 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 20 from the list above.
local5 − Specifies that local use 5 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 21 from the list above.
local6 − Specifies that local use 6 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 22 from the list above.
local7 − Specifies that local use 7 messages is sent to the remote
host. This corresponds to number 23 from the list above.
udp_port [514 | <udp_port_number 6000-65535>] − Specifies the
UDP port number that the syslog protocol is to use to send
messages to the remote host.
state [enable | disable] − Allows the sending of syslog messages to
the remote host, specified above, to be enabled and disabled.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create syslog host:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create syslog host 1 ipaddress 1.1.2.1 severity informational

facility local0 state enable
Command: create syslog host 1 ipaddress 1.1.2.1 severity informational facility
local0 state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config syslog host

Purpose To configure the syslog protocol to send system log data to a remote
host.
Syntax config syslog host [all | <index 1-4>] {severity [informational |
warning | debug] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4
| local5 | local6 | local7] | state [enable | disable] | udp_port [ 514
| <udp_port_number 6000-65535>] | ipaddress [<ipaddr> |
<ipv6addr>]}
Description The config syslog host command configures the syslog protocol to
send system log information to a remote host.
Parameters all − Specifies that the command applies to all hosts.
<index 1-4> − Specifies that the command applies to an index of

80
DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

hosts. There are four available indices, numbered 1 to 4.

severity − The message severity level indicator. These are
described in the following table (Bold font indicates that the
corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch):

Numerical Severity
Code

0 Emergency: system is unusable

1 Alert: action must be taken immediately
2 Critical: critical conditions
3 Error: error conditions
4 Warning: warning conditions
5 Notice: normal but significant condition
6 Informational: informational messages
7 Debug: debug-level messages

informational − Specifies that informational messages are to be sent

to the remote host. This corresponds to number 6 from the list
above.
warning − Specifies that warning messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 4 from the list above.
debug − Specifies that debug message are to be sent to the remote
host.
facility − Some of the operating system daemons and processes
have been assigned facility values. Processes and daemons that
have not been explicitly assigned a facility may use any of the ‘local
use’ facilities or they may use the ‘user-level’ facility. Those facilities
that have been designated are shown in the following:
Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch currently
supports.

Numerical Facility
Code

0 kernel messages
1 user-level messages
2 mail system
3 system daemons
4 security/authorization messages
5 messages generated internally by syslog
6 line printer subsystem
7 network news subsystem
8 UUCP subsystem
9 clock daemon
10 security/authorization messages
11 FTP daemon
12 NTP subsystem
13 log audit
14 log alert

81
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

15 clock daemon
16 local use 0 (local0)
17 local use 1 (local1)
18 local use 2 (local2)
19 local use 3 (local3)
20 local use 4 (local4)
21 local use 5 (local5)
22 local use 6 (local6)
23 local use 7 (local7)

local0 − Specifies that local use 0 messages are to be sent to the

remote host. This corresponds to number 16 from the list above.
local1 − Specifies that local use 1 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 17 from the list above.
local2 − Specifies that local use 2 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 18 from the list above.
local3 − Specifies that local use 3 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 19 from the list above.
local4 − Specifies that local use 4 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 20 from the list above.
local5 − Specifies that local use 5 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 21 from the list above.
local6 − Specifies that local use 6 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 22 from the list above.
local7 − Specifies that local use 7 messages are to be sent to the
remote host. This corresponds to number 23 from the list above.
udp_port [514 | <udp_port_number 6000-65535>] − Specifies the
UDP port number that the syslog protocol is to use to send
messages to the remote host.
ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] − Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6
address of the remote host to which syslog messages are to be
sent.
state [enable | disable] − Allows the sending of syslog messages to
the remote host, specified above, to be enabled and disabled.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure a syslog host:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config syslog host 1 severity debug

Command: config syslog host 1 severity debug

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete syslog host

Purpose To remove a previously configured syslog host from the Switch.
Syntax delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]

82
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The delete syslog host command removes a previously configured

syslog host from the Switch.
Parameters <index 1-4> − The syslog host index id. There are four available
indices, numbered 1 to 4.
all − Specifies that the command applies to all hosts.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a previously configured syslog host:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete syslog host all

Command: delete syslog host all

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show syslog host

Purpose To display the syslog hosts currently configured on the Switch.
Syntax show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
Description The show syslog host command displays the syslog hosts that are
currently configured on the Switch.
Parameters <index 1-4> − The syslog host index id. There are four available
indices, numbered 1 to 4.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show Syslog host information:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show syslog host

Command: show syslog host

Host 1
IP Address: 1.1.2.1
Severity : Debug
Facility : local0
UDP Port : 514
Status : Enabled

Total Entries: 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

cable diagnostic port

Purpose To determine if there are any errors on the copper cables and the
position where the errors may have occurred.

83
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Syntax cable diagnostic port [<portlist 1-10> | all]

Description The cable diagnostic port command is used to determine if there
are any errors on the copper cables and the position where the
errors may have occurred. Cable length is detected as following
range: <50m, 50~80, 80~100, >100m. Deviation is +/-5 meters,
therefore "No Cable" may be displayed under "Test Result," when
the cable used is less than 5 m in length. The Fault Distance will
show “No Cable”, whether the fiber is connected to the port or not.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports to be configured.
all − Specifies all ports on the Switch are to be configured.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To determine the copper cables and position of port 3 on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>cable diagnostic port 3

Command: cable diagnostic port 3

Perform Cable Diagnostics ...

Port Type Link Status Test Result Fault Distance (meters) Length(M)
---- ----- --------------- ----------------- --------------------------------- ---------
3 GE Link Down Pair1:N/A Pair1:No Cable N/A
Pair2:OPEN Pair2:1
Pair3:N/A Pair3:N/A
Pair4:N/A Pair4:N/A

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

84
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

13
FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDS
The Forwarding Database commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
create fdb vlan <vlanid 1-4094> <macaddr> port <port 1-10>
create multicast_fdb <vlanid 1-4094><macaddr>
config multicast_fdb < vlanid 1-4094> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist 1-10>
config fdb aging_time <sec 10-600>
delete fdb <vlan_name 20> <macaddr>
show multicast_fdb {vlan <vlan_name 20> | mac_address <macaddr>}
{port <port 1-10> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | mac_address <macaddr> | static |
show fdb
aging_time}
config multicast
[all | <portlist 1-10>] [forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
port_filtering_mode
show multicast
port_filtering_mode

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create fdb vlan

Purpose To create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table
(database)
Syntax create fdb vlan <vlanid 1-4094> <macaddr> port <port 1-10>
Description The create fdb command creates a static entry in the Switch’s
unicast MAC address forwarding database.
Parameters <vlanid 1-4094> − The VLAN ID on which the MAC address resides.
<macaddr> − The MAC address to be added to the forwarding table.
port <port 1-10> − The port number corresponding to the MAC
destination address. The Switch will always forward traffic to the
specified device through this port.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a unicast MAC FDB entry:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create fdb vlan 1 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 2
Command: create fdb vlan 1 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 2

Success!

85
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create multicast_fdb
Purpose To create a static entry in the multicast MAC address forwarding
table (database).
Syntax create multicast_fdb <vlanid 1-4094><macaddr>
Description The create multicast_fdb command creates a static entry in the
multicast MAC address forwarding table (database).
Parameters <vlanid 1-4094> − The item of the VLAN on which the MAC address
resides. The range is between 1 and 4094.
<macaddr> − The MAC address to be added to the forwarding table.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create multicast MAC forwarding:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create multicast_fdb 1 00-00-00-01-02-03

Command: create multicast_fdb 1 00-00-00-01-02-03

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config multicast_fdb
Purpose To configure the Switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding
database.
Syntax config multicast_fdb <vlanid 1-4094> <macaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist 1-10>
Description The config multicast_fdb command configures the multicast MAC
address forwarding table.
Parameters <vlanid 1-4094> − The item of the VLAN on which the MAC address
resides. The range is between 1 and 4094.
<macaddr> − The MAC address to be configured to the forwarding
table.
add − Specifies that the MAC address is to be added to the
forwarding table.
delete − Specifies that the MAC address is to be removed from the
forwarding table.
<portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be configured.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure multicast MAC forwarding:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config multicast_fdb 1 00-00-00-01-02-03

Command: config multicast_fdb 1 00-00-00-01-02-03

86
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config fdb aging_time

Purpose To set the aging time of the forwarding database.
Syntax config fdb aging_time <sec 10-600>
Description The config fdb aging_time command sets the aging time of the
forwarding database. The aging time affects the learning process of
the switch. Dynamic forwarding table entries, which are made up of
the source MAC addresses and their associated port numbers, are
deleted from the table if they are not accessed within the aging time.
The aging time can be from 0 to 630 minutes with a default value of
5 minutes. A very long aging time can result in dynamic forwarding
table entries that are out-of-date or no longer exist. This may cause
incorrect packet forwarding decisions by the switch. If the aging time
is too short however, many entries may be aged out too soon. This
will result in a high percentage of received packets whose source
addresses cannot be found in the forwarding table, in which case the
switch will broadcast the packet to all ports, negating many of the
benefits of having a switch.
Parameters <sec 10-600> − The aging time for the MAC address forwarding
database value, in seconds.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To set the fdb aging time:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config fdb aging_time 300

Command: config fdb aging_time 300

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete fdb
Purpose To delete an entry in the Switch’s forwarding database.
Syntax delete fdb <vlan_name 20> <macaddr>
Description The delete fdb command deletes an entry in the Switch’s MAC
address forwarding database.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN on which the MAC
address resides.
<macaddr> − The MAC address to be removed from the forwarding
table.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

87
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To delete a permanent FDB entry:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02

Command: delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show multicast_fdb
Purpose To display the contents of the Switch’s multicast forwarding
database.
Syntax show multicast_fdb {vlan <vlan_name 20> | mac_address
<macaddr>}
Description The show multicast_fdb command displays the current contents of
the Switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding database.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN on which the MAC
address resides.
mac_address <macaddr> − The MAC address that will be added to
the forwarding table.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display multicast MAC address table:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show multicast_fdb

Command: show multicast_fdb

Total Entries: 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show fdb
Purpose To display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database.
Syntax show fdb {port <port 1-10> | vlan <vlan_name 32> |
mac_address <macaddr> | static | aging_time}
Description The show fdb command displays the current contents of the
switch’s forwarding database.
Parameters <port 1-10> − The port number corresponding to the MAC
destination address. The Switch always forwards traffic to the
specified device through this port.
<vlan_name 32> − The name of the VLAN on which the MAC
address resides.
<macaddr> − The MAC address entry in the forwarding table.
static − Specifies that static MAC address entries are to be

88
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

displayed.
aging_time − Displays the aging time for the MAC address
forwarding database.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display unicast MAC address table:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show fdb port 3

Command: show fdb port 3

VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port Type

---- ----------------------------- -------------------------- ---- ---------------
1 default 00-00-01-01-02-03 3 Permanent

Total Entries : 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

To display the aging time:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show fdb aging_time

Command: show fdb aging_time

Unicast MAC Address Aging Time = 300 sec

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config multicast port_filtering_mode

Purpose To configure multicast filtering.
Syntax config multicast port_filtering_mode [all | <portlist 1-10>]
[forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
Description The config multicast port_filtering_mode command enables
filtering of multicast addresses.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] - A port or range of ports to be configured.
forward_unregistered_groups - Forwards unregistered multicast
packets.
filter_unregistered_groups - Filter unregistered multicast packets.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure multicast filtering

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config multicast port_filtering_mode 2

filter_unregistered_groups

89
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command: config multicast port_filtering_mode 2

filter_unregistered_groups

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show multicast port_filtering_mode

Purpose To display multicast filtering settings on the Switch.
Syntax show multicast port_filtering_mode
Description The show multicast port_filtering_mode command displays the
multicast filtering settings.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show multicast filtering settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show multicast port_filtering_mode

Command: show multicast port_filtering_mode

Multicast Filter Mode For Unregistered Group:

Forwarding List: 1,3-10
Filtering List: 2

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

90
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

14
BROADCAST STORM CONTROL COMMANDS
The Broadcast Storm Control commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
[<portlist 1-10> | all] {[action [drop | shutdown] | broadcast | multicast |
config traffic control
unknow_unicast | threshold <value 64-1024000> [enable | disable]
show traffic control {<portlist 1-10>}
config traffic_control
[storm_cleared | storm_occured | both | none]
trap

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config traffic control

Purpose To configure broadcast / multicast / unknown unicast traffic control.
Syntax config traffic control [<portlist 1-10> | all] {[action [drop |
shutdown] | broadcast | multicast | unknow_unicast | threshold
<value 64-1024000> [enable | disable]
Description The config traffic control command configures broadcast,
multicast and unknown unicast storm control.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> - A port or range of ports to be configured.
all − Specifies all ports on the Switch are to be configured.
action [drop | shutdown] − Specifies the traffic control action to be
drop or shutdown. A traffic control trap is active only when the
control action is configured as “shutdown”. If the control action is
“drop”, there will no traps issue while storm event is detected.
storm_type – The type of broadcast storm for which to configure the
traffic control. The options are:
• broadcast – Enables broadcast storm control only.
• multicast – Enables broadcast and multicast storm control.
• unknow_unicast – Enables broadcast and unicast storm
control.
threshold <value 64-1024000> − The upper threshold at which the
specified traffic control is switched on. The value is the number of
broadcast/multicast/dlf packets, in Kbps, received by the Switch that
will trigger the storm traffic control measures. The value ranges in
size from 64 to 1024000 Kbps. The default setting is 64 Kbit/sec.
[enable | disable] – Enables or disables the specified storm type.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure traffic control and enable broadcast storm control system wide:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config traffic control all multicast enable unknow_unicast
91
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

disable
Command: config traffic control all multicast enable unknow_unicast disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show traffic control

Purpose To display current traffic control settings.
Syntax show traffic control {<portlist 1-10>}
Description The show traffic control command displays the current storm traffic
control configuration on the Switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> - A port or range of ports whose settings are to be
displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display traffic control setting:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show traffic control 1-3

Command: show traffic control 1-3

Traffic Storm Control Trap :[None]

Port Thres Broadcast Multicast Unicast Action Count Time Port

hold Storm Storm Storm Down Interval Status
----- ------ -------------- --------------- ----------- ---------- -------- --------- -------
1 0 Disabled Enabled Disabled drop 0 0 Normal
2 0 Disabled Enabled Disabled drop 0 0 Normal
3 0 Disabled Enabled Disabled drop 0 0 Normal
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config traffic_control trap

Purpose To configure the traffic control trap on the Switch.
Syntax config traffic_control trap [storm_cleared | storm_occured |
both | none]
Description The config traffic_control trap command configures the current
storm traffic trap configuration on the Switch.
Parameters storm_cleared – A notification will be generated when a storm event
is cleared.
storm_occured – A notification will be generated when a storm event
is detected.
both – A notification will be generated both when a storm event is
detected and cleared.
none – No notification will be generated when storm event is
detected or cleared.

92
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure traffic trap setting:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config traffic_control trap storm_cleared

Command: config traffic_control trap storm_cleared

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

93
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

15
QOS COMMANDS
The QoS commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in
the following table.

Command Parameter
config [<portlist 1-10> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 16-1000000>] | tx_rate [no_limit |
bandwidth_control <value 16-1000000>]}
show
{[<portlist 1-10> | all]}
bandwidth_control
config qos mode [802.1p | dscp | portbased]
show qos mode
config
[strict | wrr]
scheduling_mechanism
show
scheduling_mechanism
config dscp_mapping dscp_value <value_list 0-63> queue <value 0-7>
show dscp_mapping {dscp_value <value_list 0-63>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config bandwidth_control
Purpose To configure bandwidth control on the Switch.
Syntax config bandwidth control [<portlist 1-10> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit
| <value 16-1000000>] | tx_rate [no_limit | <value 16-1000000>]}
Description The config bandwidth_control command defines bandwidth
control.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> - A port or range of ports to be configured.
all - Specifies that the config bandwidth_control command applies
to all ports on the Switch.
rx_rate - Enables ingress rate limiting
• no_limit – Indicates no limit is defined.
• <value 16–1000000>] – Indicates a range between 16-
1000000 kbps.
tx_rate – Enables egress rate limiting.
• no_limit – Indicates no limit is defined.
• <value 16–1000000>] – Indicates a range between 16-
1000000 kbps.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

94
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure bandwidth control configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config bandwidth_control all rx_rate no_limit tx_rate

no_limit
Command: config bandwidth_control all rx_rate no_limit tx_rate no_limit

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show bandwidth_control
Purpose To display bandwidth control settings on the Switch.
Syntax show bandwidth control {[<portlist 1-10> | all]}
Description The show bandwidth_control command displays bandwidth
control.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports to be configured.
all – Specifies that the show bandwidth_control command applies
to all ports on the Switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the bandwidth control configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show bandwidth_control

Command: show bandwidth_control

Port Tx Rate Rx Rate Tx Effective Rate Rx Effective Rate

----- ----------- ------------ ------------------------ --------------------------
1 no limit no limit no limit no limit
2 no limit no limit no limit no limit
3 no limit no limit no limit no limit
4 no limit no limit no limit no limit
5 no limit no limit no limit no limit
6 no limit no limit no limit no limit
7 no limit no limit no limit no limit
8 no limit no limit no limit no limit
9 no limit no limit no limit no limit
10 no limit no limit no limit no limit

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config qos mode

Purpose To configure the QoS mode.
Syntax config qos mode [802.1p | dscp | portbased]

95
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The config qos mode command is used to configure the QoS mode
on the Switch.
Parameters [802.1p | dscp | portbased] – Specifies the QoS mode to be 802.1p,
dscp or portbased.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the QoS mode to be portbased on the Switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config qos mode portbased
Command: config qos mode portbased

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show qos mode

Purpose To display the QoS mode.
Syntax show qos mode
Description The show qos mode command is used to display the QoS mode on
the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the QoS mode on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show qos mode

Command: show qos mode

Qos mode : portbased

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config scheduling_mechanism
Purpose To configure the scheduling mechanism for the QoS function.
Syntax config scheduling_mechanism [strict | wrr]
Description The config scheduling_mechanism command configures the
scheduling mechanism for the QoS function. It allows the user to
select between a round robin (WRR) and a strict mechanism for
emptying the priority classes of service of the QoS function. The
Switch contains four hardware priority classes of service. Incoming
packets must be mapped to one of these four hardware priority
classes of service, or queues. This command is used to specify the
rotation by which these four hardware priority queues are emptied.
The Switch’s default is to empty the four hardware priority queues in
order − from the highest priority hardware queue (class 3) to the
lowest priority hardware queue (class 0). Each queue will transmit all

96
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

of the packets in its buffer before allowing the next lower priority
queue to transmit its packets. A lower priority hardware queue will
be pre-empted from emptying its queue if a packet is received on a
higher priority hardware queue. The packet received on the higher
priority hardware queue transmits its packet before allowing the
lower priority hardware queue to resume clearing its queue.
Parameters strict – Specifies that the highest class of service is the first to be
processed. That is, the highest class of service should finish
emptying before the others begin.
wrr – Specifies that the priority classes of service are to empty
packets in a weighted roundrobin (WRR) order.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config scheduling_mechanism strict

Command: config scheduling_mechanism strict

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show scheduling_mechanism
Purpose To display the current traffic scheduling mechanisms in use on the
Switch.
Syntax show scheduling_mechanism
Description The show scheduling_mechanism command displays the current
traffic scheduling mechanisms in use on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the scheduling mechanism:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show scheduling_mechanism

Command: show scheduling_mechanism

Queue Mechanism : strict

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dscp_mapping
Purpose To enable setting the DSCP User Priority
Syntax config dscp_mapping dscp_value <value_list 0-63> queue
<value 0-7>
Description The config dscp_mapping command enables mapping the DSCP
value (the priority) to a specific queue (the class_id).

97
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters <value_list 0-63> –The selected value of priority. The value may be
between 0 and 63.
queue <value 0-7> – Specifies the priority to be mapped.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the DSCP mapping with value 10 and priority high:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config dscp_mapping dscp_value 10 queue 0

Command: config dscp_mapping dscp_value 10 queue 0

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show dscp_mapping
Purpose To display the setting of DSCP mapping.
Syntax show dscp_mapping {dscp_value <value_list 0-63>}
Description The show dscp_mapping command displays the mapping of DSCP
value.
Parameters dscp_value <value_list 0-63> - The selected value of priority will be
dispalyed. The value may be between 0 and 63.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the DSCP mapping with value 10:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show dscp_mapping dscp_value 10

Command: show dscp_mapping dscp_value 10

DSCP Priority
------- ------------
10 0
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

98
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

16
RMON COMMANDS
The RMON commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in
the following table.

Command Parameter
enable rmon

disable rmon
<alarm_index 1-65535> <OID_variable 255> <interval 1-2147482647> [absolute
| delta] rising-threshold <value 0-2147483647> <rising_event_index 1-65535>
create rmon alarm
falling-threshold <value 0-2147483647> <falling_event_index 1-65535> {[owner
<owner_string 32>]}
delete rmon alarm <alarm_index 1-65535>
create rmon collection
<stats_index 1-65535> port <ifindex> owner <owner_string 32>
stats
delete rmon collection
<stats_index 1-65535>
stats
create rmon collection <hist_index 1-65535> port <ifindex> {buckets <buckets_req 1-50> interval
history <interval 1-3600> owner <owner_string 32>}
delete rmon collection
<hist_index 1-65535>
history
<event_index 1-65535> description <desc_string 128> {[log | owner
create rmon event
<owner_string 32> | trap <community_string 32>]}
delete rmon event <event_index 1-65535>
{statistics <stats_index 1-65535> | alarms | events | history <hist_index 1-65535>
show rmon
| overview}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable rmon
Purpose To enable remote monitoring (RMON) status for the SNMP function.
Syntax enable rmon
Description The enable rmon command enables remote monitoring (RMON)
status for the SNMP function on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the RMON feature on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable rmon
99
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command: enable rmon

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable rmon
Purpose To disable remote monitoring (RMON) status for the SNMP function.
Syntax disable rmon
Description The disable rmon command disables remote monitoring (RMON)
status for the SNMP function on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the RMON feature on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable rmon
Command: disable rmon

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create rmon alarm

Purpose To allow the user to configure the network alarms. Network alarms
occur when a network problem, or event, is detected.
Syntax create rmon alarm <alarm_index 1-65535> <OID_variable 255>
<interval 1-2147482647> [absolute | delta] rising-threshold
<value 0-2147483647> <rising_event_index 1-65535> falling-
threshold <value 0-2147483647> <falling_event_index 1-65535>
{[owner <owner_string 32>]}
Description The create rmon alarm command allows the user to configure the
network alarms. Network alarms occur when a network problem, or
event, is detected.
Parameters <alarm_index> − Specifies the alarm number.
<OID_variable 255> − Specifies the MIB variable value.
<interval 1-2147482647> − Specifies the alarm interval time in
seconds.
[absolute | delta] − Specifies the sampling method for the selected
variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. The
possible values are absolute and delta:
• absolute –Compares the values directly with the thresholds
at the end of the sampling interval.
• delta –Subtracts the last sampled value from the current
value. The difference in the values is compared to the
threshold.
rising-threshold <value 0-2147483647> − Specifies the rising
counter value that triggers the rising threshold alarm.

100
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

<rising_event_index 1-65535> − Specifies the event that triggers the

specific alarm.
falling-threshold <value 0-2147483647> − Specifies the falling
counter value that triggers the falling threshold alarm.
<falling_event_index 1-65535> − Specifies the event that triggers
the specific alarm. The possible field values are user defined RMON
events.
owner <owner_string 32> − Specifies the device or user that defined
the alarm.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a RMON alarm on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create rmon alarm 20 1 absolute rising-threshold

200 2falling-threshold 100 1 owner dlink
Command: create rmon alarm 20 1 absolute rising-threshold 200
2falling-threshold 100 1 owner dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete rmon alarm

Purpose To remove the network alarms.
Syntax delete rmon alarm <alarm_index 1-65535>
Description The delete rmon alarm command removes the network alarms.
Parameters <alarm_index 1-65535> − Specifies the alarm number to be
removed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a RMON alarm on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete rmon alarm 100

Command: delete rmon alarm 100

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create rmon collection stats

Purpose To allow users to configure the rmon stats settings on the Switch.
Syntax create rmon collection stats <stats_index 1-65535> port
<ifindex> owner <owner_string 32>
Description The create rmon collection stats command allows users to
configure the rmon stats settings on the Switch.

101
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters <stats_index 1-65535> − Specifies the stats number.

port <ifindex> − Specifies the port from which the RMON information
was taken.
owner <owner_string 32> − Specifies the device or user that defined
the stats.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a RMON collection stats on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create rmon collection stats 100 port 1 owner dlink

Command: create rmon collection stats 100 port 1 owner dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete rmon collection stats

Purpose To remove the network collection stats.
Syntax delete rmon collection stats <stats_index 1-65535>
Description The delete rmon collection stats command removes the network
collection stats on the Switch.
Parameters <stats_index 1-65535> − Specifies the stats number to be removed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a RMON collection stats on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete rmon collection stats 2

Command: delete rmon collection stats 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create rmon collection history

Purpose To allow the user to configure the rmon history settings on the
Switch.
Syntax create rmon collection history <hist_index 1-65535> port
<ifindex> {buckets <buckets_req 1-50> interval <interval 1-
3600> owner <owner_string 32>}
Description The create rmon collection history command allows user to
configure the rmon history settings on the Switch.
Parameters <hist_index 1-65535> − Indicates the history control entry number.
port <ifindex> − Specifies the port from which the RMON information
was taken.
buckets <buckets_req 1-50> − Specifies the number of buckets that

102
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

the device saves.

interval <interval 1-3600> − Specifies in seconds the time period that
samplings are taken from the ports. The field range is 1-3600. The
default is 1800 seconds (equal to 30 minutes).
owner <owner_string 127> − Specifies the RMON station or user
that requested the RMON information.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a RMON collection history on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create rmon collection history 120 port 1 buckets 10

Command: create rmon collection history 120 port 1 buckets 10

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete rmon collection history

Purpose To remove the network collection history.
Syntax delete rmon collection history <hist_index 1-65535>
Description The delete rmon collection history command removes the
network collection history on the Switch.
Parameters <hist_index 1-65535> − Specifies the alarm history number to be
removed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a RMON collection history on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete rmon collection history 2

Command: delete rmon collection history 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create rmon event

Purpose To enable the user to configure the settings of a rmon event on the
Switch.
Syntax create rmon event <event_index 1-65535> description
<desc_string 128> {[log | owner <owner_string 32> | trap
<community_string 32>]}
Description The create rmon event command enables users to configure the
settings of a rmon event on the Switch.
Parameters <event_index 1-65535> − Specifies the event number.
description <desc_string 128> − Specifies the user-defined event
description.

103
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

log − Indicates that the event is a log entry.

owner <owner_string 32> − Specifies the time that the event
occurred.
trap <community_string 32> − Specifies the community to which the
event belongs.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a RMON collection history on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create rmon event 125 description linkrmon owner

dlink
Command: create rmon event 125 description linkrmon owner dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete rmon event

Purpose To remove the network event.
Syntax delete rmon event <event_index 1-65535>
Description The delete rmon event command removes the network event on
the Switch.
Parameters <event_index 1-65535> − Specifies the event number to be
removed.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete a RMON event on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete rmon event 2

Command: delete rmon event 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show rmon
Purpose To display remote monitoring (RMON) status for the SNMP function.
Syntax show rmon {statistics <stats_index 1-65535> | alarms | events |
history <hist_index 1-65535> | overview}
Description The show rmon command displays remote monitoring (RMON)
status for the SNMP function on the Switch.
Parameters statistics <stats_index 1-65535> − Specify the index of RMON
statistics to be displayed.
alarms – Specify the RMON alarm to be displayed.
events − Specify the RMON events to be displayed.
history <hist_index 1-65535> − Specify the RMON history to be
displayed.

104
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

overview – Display the RMON overview.

Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the RMON feature on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show rmon statistics 100 alarms

events
Command: show rmon statistics 100 alarms events

RMON is Enabled
Collection 100 on 1 is active, and owned by dlink,
Monitors ifEntry.1.1 which has
Received 0 octets, 0 packets,
0 broadcast and 0 multicast packets,
0 undersized and 0 oversized packets,
0 fragments and 0 jabbers,
0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions.
# of packets received of length (in octets):
64: 0, 65-127: 0, 128-255: 0,
256-511: 0, 512-1023: 0, 1024-1518: 0
Alarm table is empty
Event table is empty

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

105
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

17
PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS
The Port Mirroring commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable mirror

disable mirror
create mirror id <int 1-4> target <int 1-10> add source ports [rx | tx | both] <portlist 1-10>
id <int 1-4> target <short 1-10> [add | delete] source ports <portlist 1-10> [both |
config mirror
rx | tx]
show mirror {id <int 1-4>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable mirror
Purpose Used to enable a previously entered port mirroring configuration.
Syntax enable mirror
Description The enable mirror command, combined with the disable mirror
command below, allows the user to enter a port mirroring
configuration into the Switch, as well as turn port mirroring on and off
without having to modify the port mirroring configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the mirroring feature:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable mirror
Command: enable mirror

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable mirror
Purpose Used to disable a previously entered port mirroring configuration.
Syntax disable mirror
Description The disable mirror command, combined with the enable mirror
command above, allows the user to enter a port mirroring
configuration into the switch, and then turn the port mirroring on and
off without having to modify the port mirroring configuration.

106
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To disable mirroring configurations:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable mirror
Command: disable mirror

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create mirror id
Purpose Used to create a port mirroring ID.
Syntax create mirror id <int 1-4> target <int 1-10> add source ports [rx |
tx | both] <portlist 1-10>
Description The create mirror id command allows a port to have all of its traffic
also sent to a designated port, where a network sniffer or other
device can monitor the network traffic. In addition, one can specify
that only traffic received by or sent by one or both is mirrored to the
target port.
Parameters id <int 1-4> − Specifies the mirror ID to be created.
target <int 1-10> − Specifies the target of mirror ID.
[rx | tx | both] − Allows mirroring of packets received, sent or both by
the source port.
<portlist 1-10> – Specifies the port or ports being mirrored. This
cannot include the target port.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create the mirroring ID:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create mirror id 1 target 1 add source ports both 2-4

Command: create mirror id 1 target 1 add source ports both 2-4

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mirror
Purpose To configure a mirror port − source port pair on the Switch.
Syntax config mirror id <int 1-4> target <short 1-10> [add | delete]
source ports <portlist 1-10> [both | rx | tx]
Description The config mirror target command allows a port to have all of its
traffic also sent to another designated port, where a network sniffer
or other device can monitor the network traffic. In addition, one can
specify that only traffic received by or sent by one or both is mirrored

107
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

to the target port.

Parameters id <int 1-4> − Specifies the mirror ID.
target <short 1-10> − Specifies the port that mirrors traffic
forwarding.
[add | delete] − Specifies to add or delete the target port.
source ports <portlist 1-10> – Specifies the port or ports being
mirrored. This cannot include the target port.
rx – Allows mirroring of packets received by (flowing into) the source
port.
tx – Allows mirroring of packets sent to (or flowing out of) the source
port.
both – Allows mirroring of all the packets received or sent by the
source port.
Comment: The user can define up to 8 source ports and one
destination port. One source port can be configured each time using
one CLI command, so in order to configure multiple source ports,
multiple CLI commands should be used.
Restrictions A target port cannot be listed as a source port. Only Administrator or
operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add the mirroring ports:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mirror target 4 add source ports 1-3 both

Command: config mirror target 4 add source ports 1-3 both

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mirror
Purpose To show the current port mirroring configuration on the Switch.
Syntax show mirror {id <int 1-4>}
Description The show mirror command displays the current port mirroring
configuration on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display mirroring ID 1 configuration:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mirror id 1
Command: show mirror id 1

Port Mirror is Enabled

ID Target Port Ingress port Egress port Both

--- ---------------- ------------------- ------------------ ------------

108
DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

1 1 2-4 2-5 2-4

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

109
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

18
VLAN COMMANDS
The VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in
the following table.

Command Parameter
create vlan <vlan_name 20> tag <vlanid 2-4094>
delete vlan [<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 2-4094>]
[<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <int 1-4094>] [[add [tagged | untagged] | delete ]
config vlan
<portlist 1-10>
show vlan {<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | ports <portlist 1-10>}
enable asymmetric_
vlan
disable
asymmetric_vlan
show asymmetric_vlan
enable management
vlan
disable management
vlan
config management
vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>
vlan
show management
vlan
show port_vlan pvid

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create vlan
Purpose To create a VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax create vlan <vlan_name 20> tag <vlanid 2-4094>
Description The create vlan command creates a VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN to be created.
tag <vlanid 2-4094> − The VLAN ID of the VLAN to be created. The
allowed values range from 2 to 4094.
Restrictions Each VLAN name can be up to 32 characters. If the VLAN is not
given a tag, it will be a port-based VLAN.
Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

110
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To create a VLAN v1 tag 3:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create vlan v1 tag 3
Command: create vlan v1 tag 3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete vlan
Purpose To delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax delete vlan [<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 2-4094>]
Description The delete vlan command deletes a previously configured VLAN on
the Switch.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN to be deleted.
vlanid <vidlist 2-4092> − The VLAN of the VLAN to be deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
A user is required to disable Guest VLAN before deleting a VLAN.

Example usage:
To remove a vlan where VLAN ID is 2:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete vlan vlanid 2

Command: delete vlan vlanid 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config vlan
Purpose To add additional ports to a previously configured VLAN and to
modify a VLAN name.
Syntax config vlan [<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <int 1-4094>] [[add [tagged
| untagged] | delete ] <portlist 1-10>
Description The config vlan command allows the user to add or delete ports to
the port list of a previously configured VLAN. You can specify the
additional ports as tagging, untagging, or forbidden. The default is to
assign the ports as untagged.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN to be configured.
vlanid <int 1-4094 > − The ID of the VLAN to which to add ports.
add − Specifies that ports are to be added to a previously created
vlan.
delete - Specifies that ports are to be deleted from a previously
created vlan.
tagged − Specifies the additional ports as tagged.
untagged − Specifies the additional ports as untagged.
<portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be added to or deleted

111
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

from the VLAN.

Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add ports 1-3 as tagged ports to the VLAN ID 1:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config vlan vlanid 1 add tagged 1-3

Command: config vlan vlanid 1 add tagged 1-3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show vlan
Purpose To display the current VLAN configuration on the Switch
Syntax show vlan {<vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | ports
<portlist 1-10>}
Description The show vlan command displays summary information about each
VLAN including the VLAN ID, VLAN name, the Tagging/Untagging
status, and the Member/Non-member/Forbidden status of each port
that is a member of the VLAN.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − Specify the VLAN id to be displayed.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> − Specify the VLAN id to be displayed.
ports <portlist 1-10> − Specify the ports to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the Switch’s current VLAN settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show vlan

Command: show vlan

VID :1 VLAN NAME : default

VLAN Type : Static
Member Ports : 1-10
Untagged Ports : 4-10

VID : 100 VLAN NAME : rd1

VLAN Type : Static
Member Ports :
Untagged Ports :

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

112
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

enable asymmetric_vlan
Purpose To enable Asymmetric VLAN on the switch.
Syntax enable asymmetric_vlan
Description The enable asymmetric_vlan command, along with the disable
enable asymmetric_vlan command below, is used to enable and
disable Asymmetric VLAN on the Switch
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable Asymettric VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable asymmetric_vlan
Command: enable asymmetric_vlan

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable asymmetric_vlan
Purpose To disable Asymmetric VLAN on the switch.
Syntax disable asymmetric_vlan
Description The disable asymmetric_vlan command, along with the enable
asymmetric_vlan command below, is used to disable and enable
Asymmetric VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable asymmetric_vlan on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable asymmetric_vlan
Command: disable asymmetric_vlan

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show asymmetric_vlan
Purpose To display the Asymmetric VLAN status on the Switch.
Syntax show asymmetric_vlan
Description The show asymmetric_vlan command displays the Asymmetric
VLAN status on the Switch.
Parameters None.

113
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display Asymmetric VLAN status:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show asymmetric_vlan
Command: show asymmetric_vlan

Asymmetric VLAN : Enable

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable management vlan

Purpose To enable the management VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax enable management vlan
Description The enable management vlan command enables the management
VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable management VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable management vlan

Command: enable management vlan

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable management vlan

Purpose To disable the management VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax disable management vlan
Description The disable management vlan command disables the
management VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable management VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable management vlan

Command: disable management vlan

114
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config management vlan

Purpose To configure management VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax config management vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>
Description The config management vlan command configures management
VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> − Specifies management VLAN ID on the
Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the management VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config management vlanid 1

Command: config management vlanid 1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show management vlan

Purpose To display the management VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax show management vlan
Description The show management vlan command displays the management
VLAN information on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the management VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show management vlan

Command: show management vlan

management vlan is enable

management vlan id : 1
management vlan name: default
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

115
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show port_vlan pvid

Purpose To display the port PVID of VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax show port_vlan pvid
Description The show port_vlan pvid command displays the port PVID of
VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the port PVID of VLAN on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show port_vlan pvid

Command: show port_vlan pvid

Port PVID
--------------------
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 1
8 1
9 1
10 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

116
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

19
Q-IN-Q COMMANDS
The Link Aggregation commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable qinq
disable qinq
show qinq {ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]}
config qinq ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] [role [nni | uni] | outer_tpid <hex 0x1-0xffff>]

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable qinq
Purpose To enable the Q-in-Q mode.
Syntax enable qinq
Description The enable qinq command is used to enable the Q-in-Q mode.
When Q-in-Q is enabled, all network port roles will be NNI port and
their outer TPID will be set to 88a8. All existing static VLANs will run
as SP-VLAN. All dynamically learned L2 address will be cleared.
The default setting of Q-in-Q is disabled.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable Q-in-Q:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable qinq
Command: enable qinq

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable qinq
Purpose To disable the Q-in-Q mode.
Syntax disable qinq
Description The disable qinq command is used to disable the Q-in-Q mode.
All dynamically learned L2 address will be cleared. All dynamically
registered VLAN entries will be cleared. All existing SP-VLANs will
run as static 1Q VLANs. The default setting of Q-in-Q is disabled.

117
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable Q-in-Q:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable qinq
Command: disable qinq

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show qinq
Purpose To show global Q-in-Q and port Q-in-Q mode status.
Syntax show qinq {ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]}
Description The show qinq command is used to show the global Q-in-Q status,
including: port role in Q-in-Q mode and port outer TPID.
Parameters <portlist> - Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all Q-in-Q port
information.
all - Specifies all ports to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the Q-in-Q status for ports 1 to 4:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show qinq ports 1-4

Command: show qinq ports 1-4

Port Role Outer TPID

----- ------- -----------------
1 NNI 88a8
2 NNI 88a8
3 NNI 88a8
4 NNI 88a8

Total Entries : 4
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config qinq ports

Purpose Used to configure Q-in-Q ports.
Syntax config qinq ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] [role [nni | uni] |
outer_tpid <hex 0x1-0xffff>]

118
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The config qinq ports command is used to configure the port level
setting for the Q-in-Q VLAN function. This setting is not effective
when the Q-in-Q mode is disabled.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> - A range of ports to configure.
all – Specifies all ports to be configure.
role - Port role in Q-in-Q mode, it can be UNI port or NNI port.
outer_tpid - TPID in the SP-VLAN tag.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure all ports as UNI port, set outer TPID to 0xfffe:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config qinq ports all outer_tpid 0xfffe role uni

Command: config qinq ports all outer_tpid 0xfffe role uni

Warning: The outer TPID will be globally applied to all ports!

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

119
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

20
BASIC IP COMMANDS
The Basic IP commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters)
in the following table.

Command Parameter
[dhcp | dhcp_option12 {clear_hostname | hostname <hostname 63> state
config ipif system [enable | disable] } | ipaddress [<network_address> gateway <ipaddr>] | [ipv6
ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>] | [dhcpv6_client [enable | disable]] ]

show ipif

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config ipif System

Purpose To configure the DHCPv6 client state for the interface.
Syntax config ipif System [dhcp | dhcp_option12 {clear_hostname |
hostname <hostname 63> state [enable | disable] } | ipaddress
[<network_address> gateway <ipaddr>] | [ipv6 ipv6address
<ipv6networkaddr>] | [dhcpv6_client [enable | disable]] ]
Description The config ipif system command is used to configure the DHCPv6
client state for one interface.
Parameters system − The IP interface name to be configured. The default IP
Interface name on the Switch is ‘System’. All IP interface
configurations done are executed through this interface name.
dhcp − Specifies the DHCP protocol for the assignment of an IP
address to the Switch to use for the DHCP Protocol.
hostname <hostname 63> – Specifies the host name of DHCP.
ipaddress <network_address> − IP address and netmask of the IP
interface to be created. The address and mask information may be
specified by using the traditional format (for example,
10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0 or in CIDR format, 10.1.2.3/16).
gateway <ipaddr> − IP address of gateway to be created.
state [enable | disable] − Enables or disables the IP interface.
ipv6 ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> − IPv6 network address: The
address should specify a host address and length of network prefix.
There can be multiple V6 addresses defined on an interface. Thus,
as a new address is defined, it is added on this IP interface.
dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] − Enable or disable the DHCPv6
client state of the interface.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

120
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure the DHCPv6 client state of the System interface to enabled:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config ipif System dhcpv6_client enable

Command: config ipif System dhcpv6_client enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ipif
Purpose To display the configuration of an IP interface on the Switch.
Syntax show ipif
Description The show ipif command displays the configuration of an IP interface
on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display IP interface settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ipif

Command: show ipif

IP Setting Mode : Static

IP Address : 10.90.90.90
IP Subnet Mask : 255.0.0.0
IP Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Interface Admin State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
IPv6 Link-Local Address :
IPv6 Global Unicast Address :
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name : DGS-1100-10/ME
IPv4 State : Enabled
IPv6 State : Enabled
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

121
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

21
MAC NOTIFICATION COMMANDS
The MAC Notification commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable
mac_notification
disable
mac_notification
config mac_notification [interval <int 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>]
config mac_notification
[<portlist 1-10> | all] [enable | disable]
ports
show mac_notification
show mac_notification
<portlist 1-10>
ports

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable mac_notification
Purpose Used to enable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Syntax enable mac_notification
Description The enable mac_notification command is used to enable MAC
address notification without changing configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To enable MAC notification without changing basic configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable mac_notification
Command: enable mac_notification

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable mac_notification
Purpose Used to disable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Syntax disable mac_notification

122
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The disable mac_notification command is used to disable MAC

address notification without changing configuration.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To disable MAC notification without changing basic configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable mac_notification
Command: disable mac_notification

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mac_notification
Purpose Used to configure MAC address notification.
Syntax config mac_notification [interval <int 1-2147483647> |
historysize <int 1-500>]
Description The config mac_notification command is used to monitor MAC
addresses learned and entered into the FDB.
Parameters interval <int 1-2147483647> − The time in seconds between
notifications. The user may choose an interval between 1 and
2147483647 seconds.
historysize <1-500> − The maximum number of entries listed in the
history log used for notification.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To configure the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mac_notification interval 1

Command: config mac_notification interval 1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mac_notification ports

Purpose Used to configure MAC address notification status settings.
Syntax config mac_notification ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] [enable |
disable]
Description The config mac_notification ports command is used to monitor
MAC addresses learned and entered into the FDB.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured.
all – Entering this command will set all ports on the system.

123
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

[enable | disable] – These commands will enable or disable MAC

address table notification on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To enable port 7 for MAC address table notification:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mac_notification ports 7 enable

Command: config mac_notification ports 7 enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mac_notification
Purpose Used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification global
settings.
Syntax show mac_notification
Description The show mac_notification command is used to display the
Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show mac_notification
Command: show mac_notification

Global Mac Notification Settings

State : Enabled
Interval :1
History Size :1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mac_notification ports

Purpose Used to display the Switch’s MAC address table notification status
settings.
Syntax show mac_notification ports <portlist 1-10>
Description The show mac_notification ports command is used to display the
Switch’s MAC address table notification status settings.
Parameters <portlist> − Specify a port or group of ports to be viewed.
Entering this command without the parameter will display the MAC
notification table for all ports.

124
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display port’s MAC address table notification status settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mac_notification ports 1-3

Command: show mac_notification ports 1-3

Port # MAC Address Table Notification State

-------- ------------------------------------
1 Disabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

125
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

22
IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
The IGMP Snooping commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
disable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
show igmp_snooping {vlan <vlan_name 20>}
[vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [fast_leave [enable |
config igmp_snooping
disable] | state [enable | disable]]
[vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] state [enable |
disable] {host_timeout <sec 130-153025> | router_timeout <sec 60-600> |
config igmp_snooping
version <value 1-3> | last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> |
querier
max_response_time <sec 10-25> | query_interval <sec 60-600> |
robustness_variable <value 2-255>}
create igmp_snooping
<vlan_name 20> <vlanid 2-4094>
multicast_vlan
<vlan_name 20> [add | delete] [member_port <portlist 1-10> | source_port
config igmp_snooping
<portlist 1-10> | tag_member_port <portlist 1-10>] state [enable | disable]
multicast_vlan
{replace_source_ip [none | <ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]}
delete igmp_snooping
<vlan_name 20> [ip | ipv6]
multicast_vlan
config igmp_snooping
<vlan_name 20> [ip | ipv6] [add | delete] [<mcast_address_range> | all]
multicast_vlan_group
[vlan_name <string 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [add | delete] <portlist 1-
config router_ports
10>
config igmp
access_authentication [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
ports
show igmp
access_authentication [<portlist> | all]
ports
enable igmp_snooping
multicast_vlan
disable igmp_snooping
multicast_vlan
show igmp_snooping
<vlan_name 20> [ip | ipv6]
multicast_vlan
show igmp_snooping
<vlan_name 20> [ip | ipv6]
multicast_vlan_group
show igmp_snooping
{vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094>}
group

126
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command Parameter
show igmp_snooping {group <ipaddr> | ports <portlist 1-10> | vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-
host 4094>}
show router_port {vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | static | dynamic}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable igmp_snooping
Purpose To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Syntax enable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
Description The enable igmp_snooping command enables IGMP snooping on
the Switch.
Parameters {forward_mcrouter_only} – Only enables the forward mcrouter for
IGMP Snooping on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> enable igmp_snooping

Command: enable igmp_snooping

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable igmp_snooping
Purpose To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Syntax disable igmp_snooping {forward_mcrouter_only}
Description The disable igmp_snooping command disables IGMP snooping on
the switch.
Parameters {forward_mcrouter_only} – Only disables the forward mcrouter for
IGMP Snooping on the switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> disable igmp_snooping

Command: disable igmp_snooping

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

127
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show igmp_snooping
Purpose To display IGMP snooping on the switch.
Syntax show igmp_snooping {vlan <vlan_name 20>}
Description The show igmp_snooping command displays IGMP snooping on
the switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − Displays the vlan for IGMP Snooping on the
switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display IGMP snooping on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show igmp_snooping vlan default

Command: show igmp_snooping vlan default

IGMP Snooping Global State : Enabled

Forward Router Only : Enabled

VLAN Name : default

Host Timeout : 260
Router Timeout : 250
Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value :2
Last Member Query Interval :2
Querier State : Disabled
State : Enabled
Fast Leave : Disabled
Version :3

Total Entries: 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config igmp_snooping
Purpose To configure IGMP snooping on the switch.
Syntax config igmp_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094> | all] [fast_leave [enable | disable] | state
[enable | disable]]
Description The config igmp_snooping command configures IGMP snooping
on the switch.
Parameters vlan_name <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which
IGMP snooping is to be configured.

128
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

vlanid <vidlis 1-4094> − The VLAN ID for which IGMP snooping is to

be configured.
all − Specifies all VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be
configured.
fast_leave [enable | disable] − Enables or disables the fast leave
function.
state [enable | disable] − Enables or disables IGMP snooping for the
specified VLAN.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the igmp snooping:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state
enable
Command: config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state enable

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config igmp_snooping querier

Purpose To configure IGMP snooping querier on the Switch.
Syntax config igmp_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 20> |
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] state [enable | disable]
{host_timeout <sec 130-153025> | router_timeout <sec 60-600> |
version <value 1-3> | last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> |
max_response_time <sec 10-25> | query_interval <sec 60-600> |
robustness_variable <value 2-255>}
Description The config igmp_snooping querier command enables IGMP
snooping querier on a specific VLAN.
Parameters vlan_name <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which
IGMP snooping is to be configured. Up to 20 characters can be
used.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> − The VLAN id for which IGMP snooping is to
be configured.
all − Specifies all VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be
configured.
state [enable | disable] − Enables/Disables IGMP Snooping Querier.
version <value 1-3> − Specifies the IGMP Querier version on the
VLAN.
host_timeout <sec 130-153025> − Specifies the maximum amount
of time a host can be a member of a multicast group without the
switch receiving a host membership report. The default is 260
seconds.
router_timeout <sec 60-600> − Specifies the maximum amount of
time a route can be a member of a multicast group without the
switch receiving a host membership report.
last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> − Specifies the last
member query interval of IGMP. The range is from 1 to 25 seconds.
max_response_time <sec 10-25> − Specifies the max response
time of IGMP. The range is from 10 to 25 seconds.

129
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

query_interval <sec 60-600> − Specifies the query interval of IGMP.

The range is from 60 to 600 seconds.
robustness_variable <value 2-255> − The IGMP snooping
robustness variable of IGMP snooping is to be configured.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the igmp snooping:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config igmp_snooping querier vlanid 2 state enable

last_member_query_interval 2
Command: config igmp_snooping querier vlanid 2 state enable
last_member_query_interval 2

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To create an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 20> <vlanid
2-4094>
Description The create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command creates an
IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which IGMP
snooping is to be created. Up to 32 characters can be used.
<vlanid 2-4092> − The ID of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is
to be created. The range is from 2 to 4094.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create an igmp snooping multicast VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan mvln2 5

Command: create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan mvln2 5

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To configure IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 20> [add |
delete] [member_port <portlist 1-10> | source_port <portlist 1-
10> | tag_member_port <portlist 1-10>] state [enable | disable]
{replace_source_ip [none | <ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]}

130
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command enables

IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which IGMP
snooping is to be configured. Up to 32 characters can be used.
[add | delete] − Add or delete the specified multicast VLAN of IGMP
snooping.
member_port <portlist 1-10> − Specifies a port or a range of ports to
be the member port for the multicast VLAN of IGMP snooping.
source_port <portlist 1-10> − Specifies a port or a range of ports to
be the source port for the multicast VLAN of IGMP snooping.
tag_member_port <portlist 1-10> − Specifies a port or a range of
ports to be the tagged port for the multicast VLAN of IGMP
snooping.
state [enable | disable] − Enables/Disables IGMP Snooping multicast
VLAN.
replace_source_ip [none | <ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] – Specifies the
replace source IP address.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the igmp snooping multicast VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan default state

enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan default state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To remove an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 20> [ip |
ipv6]
Description The delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command removes
IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − Specify the multicast vlan name to be removed
on the Switch.
[ip | ipv6] − Specify the ip or ipv6 of multicast vlan to be removed on
the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To remove the igmp snooping multicast VLAN ‘rd1’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan rd1

Command: delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan rd1

131
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group

Purpose To specify that IGMP snooping is to be configured for multicast vlan
groups on the Switch.
Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 20>
[ip | ipv6] [add | delete] [<mcast_address_range> | all]
Description The config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group command
specifies an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN group on the Switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which IGMP
snooping is to be configured. Up to 32 characters can be used.
[ip | ipv6] − Specify the ip or ipv6 of multicast vlan group to be
configured on the Switch.
[add | delete] − Specify whether to add or delete ports defined in the
following parameter <ipaddr>.
[<mcast_address_range> | all] − Specify the address to be
configured with the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN group.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the igmp snooping multicast VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group default ip

delete all
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group default ip delete
all

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config router_ports
Purpose To configure ports as router ports.
Syntax config router_ports [vlan_name <string 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-
4094> | all] [add | delete] <portlist 1-10>
Description The config router_ports command designates a range of ports as
being connected to multicast-enabled routers. This ensures all
packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast-
enabled router − regardless of protocol, etc.
Parameters vlan_name <string 20> − The name of the VLAN on which the router
port resides. Up to 20 characters can be used.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> − The VLAN id of the VLAN on which the
router port resides.
all − Specifies all ports on the Switch to be configured.
[add | delete] – Specifies whether to add or delete ports defined in
the following parameter <portlist>, to the router port function.
<portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports that will be configured as

132
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

router ports.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add a static router port:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config router_ports vlanid 12 add 2

Command: config router_ports vlanid 12 add 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config igmp access_authentication ports

Purpose To configure the IGMP access authentication on the Switch.
Syntax config igmp access_authentication ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]
state [enable | disable]
Description The config igmp access_authentication ports command
configures the IGMP access authentication on the Switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports that will be configured as
IGMP access authentication ports.
all − Specify all ports to be configured as IGMP access
authentication ports.
state[enable | disable] − Specifies the state for the port to be
disabled or enabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure authentication port of IGMP:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config igmp access_authentication ports all state

enable
Command: config igmp access_authentication ports all state enable

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show igmp access_authentication ports

Purpose To display the IGMP access authentication configuration on the
Switch.
Syntax show igmp access_authentication ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]
Description The show igmp access_authentication command displays the
IGMP access authentication configuration on the Switch.
Parameters all − Specifies all ports to be displayed.
<portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be displayed on the

133
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the IGMP access authentication:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show igmp access_authentication ports 1-3

Command: show igmp access_authentication ports 1-3

Port Authentication State

----------------------------
1 : Enabled
2 : Enabled
3 : Enabled
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To enable IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description The enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command enables
IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Parameters multicast_vlan − Enables the multicast VLAN for IGMP Snooping on
the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Command: enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To disable IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch.
Syntax disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Description The disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command disables
IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch. IGMP snooping can
be disabled only if IP multicast routing is not being used. Disabling
IGMP snooping allows all IGMP and IP multicast traffic to flood
within a given IP interface.
Parameters multicast_vlan − Disables the multicast VLAN for IGMP Snooping on
the Switch.

134
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
TTo disable IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Command: disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Purpose To show the current status of IGMP snooping multicast VLAN on the
Switch.
Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 20> [ip | ipv6]
Description The show igmp_snooping command displays the current IGMP
snooping configuration on the Switch.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping
configuration is to be displayed. Up to 20 characters can be used.
[ip | ipv6] − Specify the ip or ipv6 of multicast vlan to be displayed on
the Switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show igmp snooping multicast VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan default

Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan default

IGMP Snooping Global State : Disable

Multicast Router Only : Disable
Data Driven Learning Max Entries : 64

VLAN Name : default

Query Interval :1
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value :2
Last Member Query Interval :1
Querier State : Disable
Querier Role : Non-Querier
Querier Select : Disable
Querier IP : 10.90.90.90
Querier Expiry Time :0
State : Enable

135
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Fast Leave : Disable

Version :3
Data Driven Learning Aged Out : Disable

CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a ALL

show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group

Purpose To show the current status of IGMP snooping multicast VLAN froup
on the Switch.
Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 20> [ip
| ipv6]
Description The show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group command
displays the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping
configuration is to be displayed. Up to 20 characters can be used.
[ip | ipv6] − Specify the ip or ipv6 of multicast vlan group to be
displayed on the Switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show igmp snooping multicast VLAN group:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group rd1

Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group rd1

VID Vlan Name IP Range

---- -------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show igmp_snooping group

Purpose To display the current IGMP snooping group configuration on the
Switch.
Syntax show igmp_snooping group {vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094>}
Description The show igmp_snooping group command displays the current
IGMP snooping group configuration on the Switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN of the IGMP
snooping group configuration information that will be displayed. Up
to 20 characters can be used.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> − The ID of the VLAN for which IGMP
snooping group configuration information is to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

136
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To show igmp snooping group:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show igmp_snooping group vlan default

Command: show igmp_snooping group vlan default

Total Entries: 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show igmp_snooping host

Purpose To display the IGMP snooping host table entries on the Switch.
Syntax show igmp_snooping host {group <ipaddr> | ports <portlist 1-
10> | vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094>}
Description The show igmp_snooping host command displays the current
IGMP snooping forwarding table entries currently configured on the
Switch.
Parameters group <ipaddr> – Specifies the IGMP Snooping group IP address to
be displayed.
ports <portlist 1-10> – Specifies the IGMP Snooping ports to be
displayed.
vlan <vlan_name 20> – Specifies the VLAN name of IGMP
Snooping to be displayed.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – Specifies the VLAN ID of IGMP Snooping
to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view the IGMP snooping host table on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show igmp_snooping host

Command: show igmp_snooping host

VLAN ID Group Port No IGMP Host

------ ---------------------- --------- ------------

Total Entries : 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show router_port
Purpose To display the currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Syntax show router_port {vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094>
| static | dynamic}

137
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The show router_port command displays the router ports currently
configured on the Switch.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> − The name of the VLAN on which the router
port resides. Up to 32 characters can be used.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> − The ID of the VLAN on which the router
port resides.
static − Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic − Displays router ports that have been dynamically learned.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the router ports:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show router_ports
Command: show router_ports

VLAN Name : default

Static router port :
Dynamic router port :
Forbidden router port :

Total Entries : 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

138
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

23
MLD SNOOPING COMMANDS
The MLD Snooping commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable mld_snooping

disable mld_snooping
[vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [state [enable |
config mld_snooping
disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable]]
config mld_snooping [vlan_name <string 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [add | delete] <portlist 1-
router_ports 10>
[vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [host_timeout <sec
130-153025> | router_timeout <sec 60-600> | last_member_query_interval <sec
config mld_snooping
1-25> | max_response_time <sec 10-25> | query_interval <sec 60-600> |
querier
robustness_variable <value 2-255> | state [enable | disable] | version <value 1-
2>]
show mld snooping [vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all]
show mld_snooping
[vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094>]
group
show mld_snooping
[vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all ] [dynamic | static]
router_ports
show mld_snooping [vlan_name <string 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | ports <portlist 1-10> | group
host <ipv6_addr>]

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable mld_snooping
Purpose To enable MLD snooping on the Switch.
Syntax enable mld snooping
Description The enable mld snooping command enables MLD snooping on the
Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the MLD snooping:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable mld_snooping
Command: enable mld_snooping

Success !

139
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable mld_snooping
Purpose To disable MLD snooping on the Switch.
Syntax disable mld snooping
Description The disable mld snooping command disables MLD snooping on
the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the MLD snooping:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable mld_snooping
Command: disable mld_snooping

Success !
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mld_snooping
Purpose To configure mld snooping.
Syntax config mld_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094> | all] [state [enable | disable] | fast_leave
[enable | disable]]
Description The config mld_snooping command defines mld snooping on the
VLAN.
Parameters vlan_name <vlan_name 20> – Specifies that the mld snooping
applies only to this previously created VLAN.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – Specifies that the mld snooping applies
only to this VLAN ID.
all – specifies that MLD snooping is to be configured for all VLANs
on the Switch.
state – Allows the user to enable or disable MLD snooping for the
specified VLAN.
fast_leave – Allows the user to enable or disable MLD snooping for
the specified VLAN.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure mld snooping:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config mld_snooping all state enable

Command: config mld_snooping all state enable

140
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mld_snooping router_ports

Purpose To enable mld mrouter ports.
Syntax config mld_snooping router_ports [vlan_name <string 20> |
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [add | delete] <portlist 1-10>
Description The config mld_snooping router_ports command defines a port
that is connected to a multicast router port.
Parameters vlan_name <string 20> – specifies that the mld snooping applies
only to this previously created VLAN.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – specifies that the mld snooping applies only
to this previously created VLAN id.
all – specifies that MLD snooping is to be configured for all VLANs
on the Switch.
add – Adds a specified port to the mld snooping mrouter port.
delete – Deletes a specified port to the mld snooping mrouter port.
<portlist 1-10> – Defines the ports to be included from the mld
snooping mrouter group.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command
Separate non–consecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of ports. These ports are
defined as connected to a multicast router.

Example usage:
To configure mld mrouter ports:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config mld_snooping router_ports vlanid 1 add 3

Command: config mld_snooping router_ports vlanid 1 add 3

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mld_snooping querier

Purpose Used to configure the timers and settings for the MLD snooping
querier for the Switch.
Syntax config mld_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 20> |
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> | all] [host_timeout <sec 130-153025> |
router_timeout <sec 60-600> | last_member_query_interval
<sec 1-25> | max_response_time <sec 10-25> | query_interval
<sec 60-600> | robustness_variable <value 2-255> | state
[enable | disable] | version <value 1-2>]
Description The config mld_snooping querier command allows users to
configure the time between general query transmissions, the

141
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

maximum time to wait for reports from listeners and the permitted
packet loss guaranteed by MLD snooping.
Parameters vlan_name <vlan_name 20> – Specifies that the mld snooping
applies only to this previously created VLAN.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – specifies that the mld snooping applies only
to this previously created VLAN id.
all – specifies that MLD snooping is to be configured for all VLANs
on the Switch.
host_timeout <sec 130-153025> − Specifies the maximum amount
of time a host can be a member of a multicast group without the
switch receiving a host membership report. The default is 260
seconds.
router_timeout <sec 60-600> − Specifies the maximum amount of
time a router can be a member of a multicast group without the
Switch receiving a host membership report.
last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> – The maximum amount of
time to be set between group-specific query messages. This interval
may be reduced to lower the amount of time it takes a router to
detect the loss of a last listener group. The user may set this interval
between 1 and 25 seconds with a default setting of 1 second.
max_response_time <sec 10-25> – The maximum time to wait for
reports from listeners. The user may specify a time between 1 and
25 seconds with a default setting of 10 seconds.
query_interval <sec 60-600> – Specifies the amount of time
between general query transmissions. The user may specify a time
between 1 and 65535 seconds with a default setting of 125 seconds.
robustness_variable <value 2-255> – Provides fine-tuning to allow
for expected packet loss on a subnet. The user may choose a value
between 1 and 255 with a default setting of 2. If a subnet is expected
to be lossy, the user may wish to increase this interval.
state [enable | disable] – Enabling the querier state will set the
Switch as a MLD querier and disabling it will set it as a Non-querier.
The default setting is disabled.
version <value 1-2> – Specify the version of MLD packet that will be
sent by this port. If a MLD packet received by the interface has a
version higher than the specified version, this packet will be forward
from router ports or VLAN flooding. The value is between 1 and 2.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure MLD snooping querier:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mld_snooping querier vlan_name 2

last_member_query_interval 1 query_interval 60
Command: config mld_snooping querier vlan_name 2 last_ member
_query_interval 1 query_interval 60

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

142
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show mld_snooping
Purpose To display mld snooping settings on the Switch.
Syntax show mld_snooping [vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid <vidlist 1-
4094> | all]
Description The show mld_snooping command displays a port from being
defined as a multicast router port by static configuration or by
automatic learning.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> – Displays that MLD snooping applies only to
this previously created VLAN.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – Displays that MLD snooping applies only to
this previously created VLAN ID.
all – Shows MLD snooping is configured for all VLANs on the
Switch.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the MLD snooping:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mld_snooping vlan default

Command: show mld_snooping vlan default

MLD Snooping Global State : Enabled

VLAN Name : default

Host Timeout : 260
Router Timeout : 250
Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value :2
Last Member Query Interval :2
Querier State : Disabled
State : Enabled
Fast Leave : Disabled
Version :2

Total Entries: 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mld_snooping group

Purpose To display mld snooping group settings on the Switch.
Syntax show mld_snooping group [vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094>]
Description The show mld_snooping group command displays the multicast

143
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

groups that were learned by MLD snooping.

Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> – The name of the VLAN for which to view the
MLD snooping group configurations.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – The ID of the VLAN for which to view the
MLD snooping group configurations.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the MLD snooping groups:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mld_snooping group vlan default

Command: show mld_snooping group vlan default

Total Entries: 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mld_snooping router_ports

Purpose To display information on dynamically learnt and static multicast
router interfaces.
Syntax show mld_snooping router_ports [vlan <vlan_name 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094> | all ] [dynamic | static]
Description The show mld_snooping router_ports command, displays both
dynamically learnt and static multicast router interfaces.
Parameters vlan <vlan_name 20> – Specifies on which VLAN MLD snooping
groups should be shown.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – Displays that the MLD snooping applies
only to this previously created VLAN ID.
all – Displays that all MLD snooping was configured for all VLANs on
the Switch.
static − Displays statically configured MLD router ports.
dynamic − Displays dynamically configured MLD router ports.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the MLD_snooping mrouterport:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mld_snooping router_ports vlanid 1

Command: show mld_snooping router_ports vlanid 1

VLAN Name : default

Static Router Port :3
Dynamic Router Port :

144
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mld_snooping host

Purpose To display information of MLD snooping host on the Switch.
Syntax show mld_snooping host [vlan_name <string 20> | vlanid
<vidlist 1-4094> | ports <portlist 1-10> | group <ipv6_addr>]
Description The show mld_snooping host command displays information
about the MLD snooping host on the Switch.
Parameters vlan_name <string 20> – Specifies which VLAN MLD snooping
groups should be shown.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> – Shows that mld snooping applies only to
this previously created VLAN ID.
ports <portlist 1-10> – Specifies which ports of MLD snooping host
to be displayed.
group <ipv6_addr> – Specifies the IPv6 address.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the MLD_snooping host:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mld_snooping host vlan_name default

Command: show mld_snooping host vlan_name default

VLAN ID Group Port No Host

------------ ----------------------- ------------ --------------

Total Entries: 0
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

145
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

24
LIMITED IP MULTICAST ADDRESS COMMANDS
The 802.1X commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters)
in the following table.

Command Parameter
create
[ipv4 | ipv6] profile_id <integer 1-24> profile_name string
mcast_filter_profile
config [profile_id <integer 1-24> | profile_name <string 32>] [add | delete]
mcast_filter_profile <mcast_addr>
config
[profile_id <integer 1-24> | profile_name <string 32>] [add | delete]
mcast_filter_profile
<ipv6_mcast_addr>
ipv6
delete
[ipv4 | ipv6] [profile_id<integer 1-24> | profile_name <string 32>]
mcast_filter_profile
show
{[ipv4 | ipv6]} {profile_id <integer 1-24> | profile_name <string 32>}
mcast_filter_profile
config
<portlist 1-10> [ipv4 | ipv6] {[add | delete] [max_group <integer 1-256> | access
limited_multicast_addr
[permit | deny]}
ports
show
limited_multicast_addr <portlist 1-10> {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
ports
show
max_mcast_group <portlist 1-10> {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
ports

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create mcast_filter_profile
Purpose To create multicast filtering profile on the Switch.
Syntax create mcast_filter_profile [ipv4 | ipv6] profile_id <integer 1-24>
profile_name string
Description The create mcast_filter_profile command displays the multicast
filtering profiles settings.
Parameters [ipv4 | ipv6] – Specifies which IPv4 or IPv6 multicast filter profile to
be created on the Switch.
profile_id <integer 1-24> - Specifies the profile ID of the multicast
filter on the Switch.
profile_name string - Specifies the profile name of the multicast filter
profile on the Switch.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

146
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To create an IPv4 multicast filtering profile on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_id 1 profile_name

string
Command: create mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_id 1 profile_name string

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mcast_filter_profile
Purpose To configure multicast filtering profile on the Switch.
Syntax config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <integer 1-24> |
profile_name <string 32>] [add | delete] <mcast_addr>
Description The config mcast_filter_profile command displays the multicast
filtering profiles settings.
Parameters profile_id <integer 1-24> - Specify the profile ID to be added or
deleted for the multicast filter.
profile_name <string 32> - The name of the VLAN on which the
MAC address resides.
[add | delete] – Add or delete the profile ID which user specified.
<mcast_addr> – Specify the range of IPv4 address.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To add the multicast address range 225.1.1.1 to 225.1.1.10 to the profile on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 add 225.1.1.1

225.1.1.10
Command: config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 add 225.1.1.1 225.1.1.10

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config mcast_filter_profile ipv6

Purpose To configure IPv6 multicast filtering profile on the Switch.
Syntax config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 [profile_id <integer 1-24> |
profile_name <string 32>] [add | delete] <ipv6_mcast_addr>
Description The config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 command is used to add or
delete a range of IPv6 multicast addresses to the profile
Parameters profile_id <integer 1-24> - Specify the profile id to be added or
deleted for the multicast filter.
profile_name <string 32> - The name of the VLAN on which the
MAC address resides.
[add | delete] – Add or delete the profile ID which the user specified.
<ipv6_mcast_addr> – Lists the IPv6 multicast addresses to put in

147
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

the profile
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add the IPv6 multicast address range FFF0E::100:0:0:20 – FFF0E::100:0:0:22 to profile ID 4 on the
Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 4 add

FF0E::100:0:0:20 FF0E::100:0:0:22
Command: config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 4 add
FF0E::100:0:0:20 FF0E::100:0:0:22

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete mcast_filter_profile
Purpose To delete an entry in the switch’s forwarding database.
Syntax delete mcast_filter_profile [ipv4 | ipv6] [profile_id<integer 1-24>
| profile_name <string 32>]
Description The delete mcast_filter_profile command deletes a profile in the
switch’s multicast forwarding filtering database.
Parameters [ipv4 | ipv6] – Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 of multicast filter profile to be
removed on the switch.
profile_id <integer 1-24> − The profile id of the VLAN on which the
multicast forwarding filtering database resides.
profile_name <string 32> − The name of the VLAN on which the
multicast forwarding filtering database resides.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To delete the IPv4 multicast address profile with a profile name of rd3:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_name rd3

Command: delete mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_name rd3

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show mcast_filter_profile
Purpose To display multicast filtering settings on the Switch.
Syntax show mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {profile_id <integer 1-
24> | profile_name <string 32>}
Description The show mcast_filter_profile command displays the multicast
filtering profiles settings.
Parameters [ipv4 | ipv6] – Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 of multicast filter profile to be
displayed on the Switch.

148
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

profile_id <integer 1-24> - Specify the profile ID of the multicast filter

profile to be displayed.
profile_name <string 32> - Specify the profile name of the multicast
filter profile to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display all the defined multicast address profiles:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_id 1

Command: show mcast_filter_profile ipv4 profile_id 1

Mcast Filter Profile:

Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses

--------------- ------------------------------ ------------------------------
1 string

Total Profile Count: 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config limited_multicast_addr ports

Purpose To configure the multicast address filtering function on a port.
Syntax config limited_multicast_addr ports <portlist 1-10> [ipv4 | ipv6]
{[add | delete] [max_group <integer 1-256> | access [permit |
deny]}
Description The config limited_multicast_addr ports command is used to
configure the multicast address filtering function on a port. When
there are no profiles specified with a port, the limited function is not
effective.
Parameters ports <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports on which the limited
multicast address range to be configured has been assigned.
[ipv4 | ipv6] – Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 of multicast filter profile to be
configured.
add – Add a multicast address profile to a port.
delete – Delete a multicast address profile to a port.
permit – Specifies the packet that matches the addresses defined in
the profiles will be permitted. The default mode is permit.
deny – Specifies that the packet matches the addresses defined in
the profiles will be denied.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure ports 1 and 3 to set the IPv6 multicast address profile ID 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config limited_multicast_addr ports 1 ipv6 access permit
Command: config limited_multicast_addr ports 1 ipv6 access permit
149
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show limited_multicast_addr ports

Purpose Used to show the per-port Limited IP multicast address range.
Syntax show limited_multicast_addr ports <portlist 1-10> {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Description The show limited_multicast_addr ports command is to display the
multicast address range by port or by VLAN.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – Used to show the per-port Limited IP multicast
address range.
[ipv4 | ipv6] – Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 of limited multicast address to
be displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To show the IPv4 limited multicast address on ports 1 and 3:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show limited_multicast_addr ports 1

Command: show limited_multicast_addr ports 1

Port : 1
Access: permit

Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses

-------------- ------------------------------ ------------------------------

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show max_mcast_group ports

Purpose To display maximum multicast group ports on the Switch.
Syntax show max_mcast_group ports <portlist 1-10> {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Description The show max_mcast_group ports command displays the
multicast filtering profiles settings.
Parameters <portlist> - Specify a port or a range of ports to be displayed.
{[ipv4 | ipv6]} – Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show IPv6 maximum multicast group port 1 settings:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show max_mcast_group ports 1 ipv6
Command: show max_mcast_group ports 1 ipv6

150
DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Port MaxMcastGroup
----- --------------
1 256
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

151
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

25
802.1X COMMANDS
The 802.1X commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters)
in the following table.

Command Parameter
enable 802.1x

disable 802.1x

show 802.1x

show 802.1x
{ports <portlist 1-10>}
auth_state
show 802.1x
{ports <portlist 1-10>}
auth_configuration
[<portlist 1-10> | all] [default | { port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] |
config 802.1x quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout <sec 1-
auth_parameter ports 65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req <value 1-10> | reauth_period
<sec 1-65535> | enable_reauth [enable | disable] | direction [both | in]}]
config 802.1x
[radius_eap | local]
auth_protocol
<server_index 1-3> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] [key <passwd 32>] {default |
config radius add auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535>
| timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
<server_index 1-3> { key <passwd 32> | auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535>
config radius | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] |
retransmit <int 1-255> | timeout <int 1-255>}

show radius

config 802.1x
[port_based | mac_based]
auth_mode
create 802.1x guest
<vlan_name 20>
vlan
delete 802.1x guest
<vlan_name 20>
vlan
config 802.1x
[<portlist 1-10> | all] state [enable | disable]
guest_vlan ports
show 802.1x
guest_vlan
create 802.1x user <username 15>

show 802.1x user

delete 802.1x user <username 15>

152
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command Parameter
config 802.1x capability
[<portlist 1-10> | all] [authenticator | none]
ports

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable 802.1x
Purpose To enable the 802.1x server on the Switch.
Syntax enable 802.1x
Description The enable 802.1x command enables the 802.1x Port-based
Network Access control server application on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable 802.1x switch wide:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable 802.1x
Command: enable 802.1x

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable 802.1x
Purpose To disable the 802.1x server on the switch.
Syntax disable 802.1x
Description The disable 802.1x command disables the 802.1x port-based
network access control server application on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable 802.1x on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable 802.1x
Command: disable 802.1x

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show 802.1x
Purpose To display the 802.1x server information on the Switch.

153
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Syntax show 802.1x

Description The show 802.1x command displays the 802.1x port-based network
access control server application on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display 802.1x on the Switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show 802.1x
Command: show 802.1x

802.1X : Enable
Authentication Mode : Port_base
Authentication Method : Local
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show 802.1x auth_state

Purpose To display the current authentication state of the 802.1x server on the
Switch.
Syntax show 802.1x auth_state {ports <portlist 1-10>}
Description The show 802.1x auth_state command displays the current 802.1x
authentication state of the specified ports of the port-based network
access control server application on the switch.
The following details are displayed:
Port number − Shows the physical port number on the switch.
Auth PAE State: Initialize / Disconnected / Connecting / Authenticating
/ Authenticated / Held / ForceAuth / ForceUnauth − Shows the current
state of the Authenticator PAE.
Backend State: Request / Response / Fail / Idle / Initialize / Success /
Timeout − Shows the current state of the Backend Authenticator.
Port Status: Authorized / Unauthorized − Shows the result of the
authentication process. Authorized means that the user was
authenticated, and can access the network. Unauthorized means that
the user was not authenticated, and cannot access the network.
Parameters ports <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports whose settings are to
be displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the 802.1x authentication states for port 1~3 for Port-based 802.1x:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-3

Command: show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-3

Port Auth PAE State Backend State Port Status

------ -------------- ------------- ------------
1 Initialize Initialize Authorized

154
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

2 Initialize Initialize Authorized

3 Initialize Initialize Authorized
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show 802.1x auth_configuration

Purpose To display the current configuration of the 802.1x server on the
Switch.
Syntax show 802.1x auth_configuration {ports <portlist 1-10>}
Description The show 802.1x auth_configuration command displays the
current configuration of the 802.1x port-based network access
control server application on the switch.
The following details are displayed:
802.1x: Enabled/Disabled − Shows the current status of 802.1x
functions on the switch.
Authentication Mode: Port-based/Mac-based/None − Shows the
802.1x authorization mode.
Authentication Method: Remote/none − Shows the type of
authentication protocol suite in use between the switch and a
RADIUS server.
Port number : Shows the physical port number on the switch.
AdminCrlDir: Both/In − Shows whether a controlled Port that is
unauthorized will exert control over communication in both receiving
and transmitting directions, or just the receiving direction.
OpenCrlDir: Both/In − Shows whether a controlled Port that is
unauthorized will exert control over communication in both receiving
and transmitting directions, or just the receiving direction.
Port Control: ForceAuth/ForceUnauth/Auto − Shows the
administrative control over the port’s authorization status. ForceAuth
forces the authenticator of the port to become authorized.
ForceUnauth forces the port to become unauthorized.
QuietPeriod : Shows the time interval between authentication failure
and the start of a new authentication attempt.
TxPeriod : Shows the time to wait for a response from a supplicant
(user) to send EAP Request/Identity packets.
SuppTimeout : Shows the time to wait for a response from a
supplicant (user) for all EAP packets, except for the request/identity
packets.
ServerTimeout : Shows the length of time to wait for a response
from a RADIUS server.
MaxReq : Shows the maximum number of times that you can retry
sending packets to the supplicant.
ReAuthPeriod : Shows the time interval between successive
reauthentications.
ReAuthenticate: true/false − Shows whether or not to reauthenticate.
Parameters ports <portlist 1-10> − Specifies a port or range of ports to be
viewed.
Restrictions None.

155
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display the 802.1x configurations of port 2:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 2
Command: show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 2

Port number :2
Capability : none
AdminCrlDir : Both
OperCrlDir : Both
Port Control : ForceAuthorized
QuietPeriod : 60 sec
TxPeriod : 30 sec
SuppTimeout : 30 sec
ServerTimeout : 30 sec
MaxReq : 2 times
ReAuthPeriod : 3600 sec
ReAuthenticate : Disabled

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config 802.1x auth_parameter ports

Purpose To configure the 802.1x authentication parameters on a range of
ports. The default parameter returns all ports in the specified range
to their default 802.1x settings.
Syntax config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]
[default | { port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] |
quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> |
supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> |
max_req <value 1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> |
enable_reauth [enable | disable] | direction [both | in]}]
Description The config 802.1x auth_parameter ports command configures the
802.1x authentication parameters on a range of ports. The default
parameter returns all ports in the specified range to their default
802.1x settings.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – A port, range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
all – Specifies all of the ports on the Switch.
default – Returns all of the ports in the specified range to their
802.1x default settings.
port_control – Configures administrative control over the
authentication process for a range of ports. The options are:
• force_auth – Forces the Authenticator for the port to
become authorized. Network access is allowed.
• auto – Allows the port’s status to reflect the outcome of the
authentication process.
• force_unauth – Forces the Authenticator for the port to
become unauthorized. Network access is blocked.
quiet_period <sec 0-65535> – Configures the time interval between

156
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

authentication failure and the start of a new authentication attempt.

tx_period <sec 1-65535> - Configures the time to wait for a
response from a supplicant (user) to send EAP Request/Identity
packets.
supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> - Configures the time to wait for a
response from a supplicant (user) for all EAP packets, except for the
Request/Identity packets.
server_timeout <sec 1-65535> - Configures the length of time to wait
for a response from a RADIUS server.
max_req <value 1-10> – Configures the number of times to retry
sending packets to a supplicant (user).
reauth_period <sec 300-4294967295> – Configures the time interval
between successive re-authentications.
enable_reauth [enable | disable] – Determines whether or not the
switch will re-authenticate. Enabling will cause re-authentication of
users at the time interval specified in the Re-authentication Period
field, above.
direction [both | in] –Sets the administrative-controlled direction to
Both. If Both is selected, control is exerted over both incoming and
outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field.
The In option is not supported in the present firmware release.

Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure 802.1x authentication parameters for ports 1 – 3:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-3 direction both

Command: config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-3 direction both

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config 802.1x auth_protocol

Purpose To configure the 802.1x authentication protocol on the switch .
Syntax config 802.1x auth_protocol [radius_eap | local]
Description The config 802.1x auth_protocol command enables configuration
of the authentication protocol.
Parameters radius_eap – Uses the list of RADIUS EAP servers for
authentication.
local – Uses no authentication.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the RADIUS (AAA) authentication protocol on the Switch:

157
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config 802.1x auth_protocol local

Command: config 802.1x auth_protocol local

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config radius add

Purpose To configure the settings that the switch uses to communicate with a
RADIUS server.
Syntax config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]
[key <passwd 32>] {default | auth_port <udp_port_number 1-
65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
Description The config radius add command configures the settings the Switch
uses to communicate with a RADIUS server.
Parameters <server_index 1-3> – The index of the RADIUS server.
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6_addr]> – The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the RADIUS
server.
key – Specifies that a password and encryption key are to be used
between the Switch and the RADIUS server.
<passwd 32> – The shared-secret key used by the RADIUS server
and the Switch. Up to 128 characters can be used.
default – Uses the default udp port number in both the auth_port and
acct_port settings.
auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> – The UDP port number for
authentication requests. The default is 1812.
acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> – The UDP port number for
accounting requests. The default is 1813.
retransmit <int 1-255> –The number of times the device resends an
authentication request when the server does not respond. The value
is between 1 and 255.
timeout <int 1-255> –Specifies the connection timeout. The value
may be between 1 and 255 seconds.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the RADIUS server communication settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config radius add 1 10.90.90.99 key dfjk auth_port 100

acct_port 1000 timeout 1 retransmit 10
Command: config radius add 1 10.90.90.99 key dfjk auth_port 100 acct_port
1000 t
imeout 1 retransmit 10

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

158
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config radius delete

Purpose To delete a previously entered RADIUS server configuration.
Syntax config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
Description The config radius delete command deletes a previously entered
RADIUS server configuration.
Parameters <server_index 1-3> – The index of the RADIUS server.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete previously configured RADIUS server communication settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config radius delete 1

Command: config radius delete 1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>#

config radius
Purpose To configure the Switch’s RADIUS settings.
Syntax config radius <server_index 1-3> { key <passwd 32> | auth_port
<udp_port_number 1-65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-
65535> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | retransmit <int 1-
255> | timeout <int 1-255>}
Description The config radius command configures the Switch’s RADIUS
settings.
Parameters <server_index 1-3> – The index of the RADIUS server.
key – Specifies that a password and encryption key are to be used
between the Switch and the RADIUS server.
• <passwd 32> – The shared-secret key used by the
RADIUS server and the Switch. Up to 128 characters can
be used.
auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> – The UDP port number for
authentication requests. The default is 1812.
acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> – The UDP port number for
accounting requests. The default is 1813.
ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] – The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the
RADIUS server.
retransmit <int 1-255> –The number of times the device resends an
authentication request when the server does not respond. The value
is between 1 and 255.
timeout <int 1-255> –Specifies the connection timeout. The value
may be between 1 and 255 seconds.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

159
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure the RADIUS settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config radius 1 ipaddress 10.48.47.11

Command: config radius 1 ipaddress 10.48.47.11

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show radius
Purpose To display the current RADIUS configurations on the Switch.
Syntax show radius
Description The show radius command displays the current RADIUS
configurations on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display RADIUS settings on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show radius
Command: show radius

Index Ip Address Auth-Port Acct-Port Timeout Retransmit Key

----- ---------------- --------- ---------- --------- --------------- ------
1 10.48.74.121 1812 1813 5 10 dlink

Total Entries : 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config 802.1x auth_mode

Purpose To configure the 802.1x authentication mode on the switch.
Syntax config 802.1x auth_mode [port_based | mac_based]
Description The config 802.1x auth_mode command enables either the port-
based or MAC-based 802.1x authentication feature on the switch.
Parameters [port_based | mac_based] – Specifies whether 802.1x
authentication is by port or MAC address.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure 802.1x authentication by port address:

160
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config 802.1x auth_mode port_based

Command: config 802.1x auth_mode port_based

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create 802.1x guest_vlan

Purpose Enables network access to a Guest VLAN.
Syntax create 802.1x guest vlan <vlan_name 20>
Description The create 802.1x guest_vlan command enables network access
to a 802.1x Guest VLAN. A network administrator can use 802.1x
Guest VLANs to deny network access via port–based authentication,
but grant Internet access to unauthorized users.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the 802.1x Guest VLAN to be
created.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a 802.1x Guest VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create 802.1x guest_vlan default

Command: create 802.1x guest_vlan default

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete 802.1x guest_vlan

Purpose Disables network access to a Guest VLAN.
Syntax delete 802.1x guest vlan <vlan_name 20>
Description The delete 802.1x guest_vlan command disables network access
to a 802.1x Guest VLAN. A network administrator can use 802.1x
Guest VLANs to deny network access via port–based authentication,
but grant Internet access to unauthorized users.
Parameters <vlan_name 20> − The name of the 802.1x Guest VLAN to be
deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
The user is required to disable Guest VLAN before deleting a
specific the VLAN.

Example usage:
To delete a 802.1x Guest VLAN

161
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete 802.1x guest_vlan default

Command: delete 802.1x guest_vlan default

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config 802.1x guest_vlan ports

Purpose Defines a port or range of ports to be members of the Guest VLAN.
Syntax config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] state
[enable | disable]
Description The config 802.1x guest_vlan ports command defines a port or
range of ports to be members of the 802.1x Guest VLAN. The
802.1x Guest VLAN can be be configured to provide limited network
access to authorized member ports. If a member port is denied
network access via port–based authorization, but the 802.1x Guest
VLAN is enabled, the member port receives limited network access.
For example, a network administrator can use the 802.1x Guest
VLAN to deny internal network access via port–based
authentication, but grant Internet access to unauthorized users.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports to be configured to the
Guest VLAN.
all – Indicates all ports to be configured to the guest vlan.
state [enable | disable] – Specifies the guest vlan port is enabled or
disabled of the switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure ports to the Guest VLAN:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1-3 state enable

Command: config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1-3 state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show 802.1x guest_vlan

Purpose Displays configuration information for the Guest VLAN.
Syntax show 802.1x guest_vlan
Description The show 802.1x guest_vlan command displays the Guest VLAN
name, state, and member ports.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the Guest VLAN configuration information:

162
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show 802.1x guest_vlan

Command: show 802.1x guest_vlan

Guest VLAN Settings

------------------------------------------------------------------------
Guest VLAN : default
Enabled Guest VLAN Ports : 1,2,3,4,5,6

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create 802.1x user

Purpose Enable network access to a 802.1x user.
Syntax create 802.1x user <username 15>
Description The create 802.1x user command enables network access to a
802.1x user.
Parameters <vlan_name 15> − The name of the 802.1x user to be created.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a 802.1x user:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create 802.1x user dlink

Command: create 802.1x user dlink

Enter a case-sensitive new password:****

Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show 802.1x user

Purpose Displays the user information for the 802.1x.
Syntax show 802.1x user
Description The show 802.1x user command displays the 802.1x user
information on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the 802.1x user information:

163
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show 802.1x user

Command: show 802.1x user

Index Username
------------ ---------------
1 dlink

Total Entries: 1
Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete 802.1x user

Purpose Deletes network access to 802.1x users.
Syntax delete 802.1x user <username 15>
Description The delete 802.1x user command deletes network access to a
802.1x user.
Parameters <vlanname 15> − The name of the 802.1x user to be deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the 802.1x user:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete 802.1x user dlink

Command: delete 802.1x user dlink

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config 802.1x capability ports

Purpose Defines a port or range of ports to be members of the 802.1x.
Syntax config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist 1-10> | all]
[authenticator | none]
Description Th config 802.1x capability ports is used to configure the
capability for the 802.1x on the Switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports to be configured to the
802.1x capability.
all – Indicates all ports to be configured to the 802.1x capability.
[authenticator | none] – Specifies the 802.1x capability port to be
authenticator or none.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure capability ports to the 802.1x on the Switch:
164
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config 802.1x capability ports all authenticator

Command: config 802.1x capability ports all authenticator

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

165
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

26
PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
The Port Security commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
[<portlist 1-10> | all] [admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr
config port_security <max_lock_no 0-64> | lock_address_mode [Permanent | DeleteOnTimeout |
DeleteOnReset]
show port_security {ports <portlist 1-10>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config port_security
Purpose To configure port security settings.
Syntax config port_security [<portlist 1-10> | all] [admin_state [enable |
disable] | max_learning_addr <max_lock_no 0-64> |
lock_address_mode [Permanent | DeleteOnTimeout |
DeleteOnReset]
Description The config port_security command configures port security
settings for specific ports.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports to be configured.
all – Configures port security for all ports on the Switch.
admin_state [enable | disable] – Enables or disables port security for
the listed ports.
max_learning_addr <int 0-64> - Specify the max learning address.
The range is 0 to 64.
1-64 Limits the number of MAC addresses dynamically listed in the
FDB for the ports.
lock_address_mode – Defines the TBD and contains the following
options:
• Permanent – Learns up to the maximum number of dynamic
addresses allowed on the port. The learned addresses are
not aged out or relearned on other ports as long as the port
is locked.
• DeleteOnReset – Deletes the current dynamic MAC
addresses associated with the port. Learn up to the
maximum addresses allowed on the port (this number is
also configurable). Aging is disabled; the addresses are
deleted on reset
• DeleteOnTimeout – Deletes the current dynamic MAC
addresses associated with the port. The port learns up to
the maximum addresses allowed on the port. Re-learned
MAC addresses and address aging out are also enabled.
The MAC addresses are deleted when the device is reset
and when the address is aged out.

166
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To configure port security:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config port_security 1-5 admin_state enable

max_learning_addr 5 lock_address_mode DeleteOnReset
Command: config port_security 1-5 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 5
lock_address_mode DeleteOnReset

Success!

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show port_security
Purpose To display the current port security configuration.
Syntax show port_security {ports <portlist 1-10>}
Description The show port_security command displays port security
information for the Switch’s ports. The information displayed
includes port security, admin state, the maximum number of learning
addresses, lock mode and trap interval.
Parameters ports <portlist 1-10> – A port or range of ports whose settings are
to be displayed.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display the port security configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show port_security ports 1-5

Command: show port_security ports 1-5

Port Admin state Max.Learning Addr. Lock Address Mode

---- ------------- -------------------------- -------------------
1 enabled 5 DeleteOnReset
2 enabled 5 DeleteOnReset
3 enabled 5 DeleteOnReset
4 enabled 5 DeleteOnReset
5 enabled 5 DeleteOnReset

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

167
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

27
PORT PRIORITY COMMANDS
The Port Priority commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config port_ priority [<portlist 1-10> | all] priority <value 0-7>
show port_priority { all | <portlist 1-10> }

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config port_priority
Purpose To configure port priority settings.
Syntax config port_priority [<portlist 1-10> | all] priority [highest | low |
medium | high]
Description The config port_ priority command configures port priority settings
for specific ports.
Parameters {all | <portlist 1-10>} – Specifies all ports or a range of ports to be
configured.
<value 0-7> – Specifies the priority of ports mapping priority queue.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command

Example usage:
To configure port priority:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config port_priority 3 priority 7

Command: config port_priority 3 priority 7

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show port_priority
Purpose To display the current port priority configuration.
Syntax show port_priority { all | <portlist 1-10> }
Description The show port_ priority command displays port priority information
for the switch’s ports.
Parameters {all | <portlist 1-10>} – All ports or range of ports whose settings are
to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

168
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display the port 1~3 priority configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show port_priority 1-3

Command: show port_priority 1-3

Port Priority Effective Priority

---- ---------- --------------------------
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 7 7
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

169
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

28
TIME AND SNTP COMMANDS
The Time and SNTP commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
{primary [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | secondary [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | poll-
config sntp
interval <sec 30-99999>}

show sntp

enable sntp

disable sntp

config time <date> <systime>

config time_zone [+ hour <gmt_hour 0-13> minute <minute 0-59> | - hour <gmt_hour 0-12> minute
operator <minute 0-59>]
[disable | [annual s_date <start_date 1-31> s_mth <start_mth 1-12> s_time
config dst <start_time> end_date <int 1-31> e_mth <end_mth 1-12> e_time <end_time> |
offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]]]

show time

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config sntp
Purpose To setup SNTP service.
Syntax config sntp {primary [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | secondary
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | poll-interval <sec 30-99999>}
Description The config sntp command configures SNTP service from an SNTP
server. SNTP must be enabled for this command to function (See
enable sntp).
Parameters primary [<ipaddr>| <ipv6addr>] – Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address
of the primary SNTP server.
secondary [<ipaddr>| <ipv6addr>] – Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6
address of the secondary SNTP server.
poll-interval <sec 30-99999> – The interval between requests for
updated SNTP information. The polling interval ranges from 60
seconds (1 minute) to 86,400 seconds (1 day).
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
SNTP service must be enabled for this command to function (enable
sntp).

170
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure SNTP settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-

interval 60
Command: config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 60

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show sntp
Purpose To display the SNTP information.
Syntax show sntp
Description The show sntp command displays SNTP settings information,
including the source IP address, time source and poll interval.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display SNTP configuration information:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show sntp
Command: show sntp

SNTP Information
------------------------------------------
Current Time Source : Local
SNTP : Disabled
SNTP Primary Server : 10.1.1.1
SNTP Secondary Server : 10.1.1.2
SNTP Poll Interval : 60 sec

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

171
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

enable sntp
Purpose To enable SNTP server support.
Syntax enable sntp
Description The enable sntp command enables SNTP server support. SNTP
service must be separately configured (see config sntp). Enabling
and configuring SNTP support override any manually configured
system time settings.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator and Operator-level users can issue this
command. SNTP settings must be configured for SNTP to function
(config sntp).

Example usage:
To enable the SNTP function:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable sntp
Command: enable sntp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable sntp
Purpose To disable SNTP server support.
Syntax disable sntp
Description The disable sntp command disables SNTP support.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable SNTP support:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable sntp
Command: disable sntp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

172
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config time
Purpose To manually configure system time and date settings.
Syntax config time <date> <systime>
Description The config time date command configures the system time and
date settings. These will be overridden if SNTP is configured and
enabled.
Parameters <date> –Specifies the date, using two numerical characters for the
day of the month, English abbreviation for the name of the month,
and four numerical characters for the year. For example: 19jan2011.
<systime > – Specifies the system time, using the format hh:mm:ss;
that is, two numerical characters each for the hour using a 24-hour
clock, the minute and second. For example: 19:42:30.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Manually configured system time and date settings are overridden if
SNTP support is enabled.

Example usage:
To manually set system time and date settings:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config time 09jan2012 15:50:50

Command: config time 09jan2012 15:50:50

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config time_zone operator

Purpose To determine the time zone used in order to adjust the system clock.
Syntax config time_zone operator [+ hour <gmt_hour 0-13> minute
<minute 0-59> | - hour <gmt_hour 0-12> minute <minute 0-59>]
Description The config time_zone operator command adjusts the system clock
settings according to the time zone. Time zone settings adjust SNTP
information accordingly.
Parameters operator – May be (+) to add or (-) to subtract time to adjust for a
time zone relative to GMT.
hour <gmt_hour 0-13> – Specifies the number of hours difference
from GMT.
minute <minute 0-59> – Specifies the number of minutes added or
subtracted to adjust the time zone.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure time zone settings:

173
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config time_zone operator + hour 2 minute 30

Command: config time_zone operator + hour 2 minute 30

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config dst
Purpose To configure time adjustments to allow for the use of Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
Syntax config dst [disable | [annual s_date <start_date 1-31> s_mth
<start_mth 1-12> s_time <start_time> end_date <int 1-31>
e_mth <end_mth 1-12> e_time <end_time> | offset [30 | 60 | 90 |
120]]]
Description The config dst command disables or configures Daylight Saving
Time (DST). When enabled, this adjusts the system clock to comply
with any DST requirement. DST adjustment affects system time for
both manually configured time and time set using SNTP service.
Parameters disable – Disables the DST seasonal time adjustment for the switch.
annual – Enables DST seasonal time adjustment on an annual
basis. Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending
date be specified concisely. For example, specify to begin DST on
April 3 and end DST on October 14. The format for annual mode is
as follows, and in the order listed:
• s_date <start_date 1-31> - The day of the month to begin
DST, expressed numerically.
• s_mth <start_mth 1-12> - The month of the year to begin
DST, expressed numerically.
• s_time <start_time> - The time of day to begin DST in hours
and minutes, expressed using a 24-hour clock.
• end_date <int 1-31> - The day of the month to end DST,
expressed numerically.
• e_mth <end_mth 1-12> - The month of the year to end DST,
expressed numerically.
• e_time<end_time> - The time of day to end DST, in hours
and minutes, expressed using a 24-hour clock.
offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120] – Indicates the number of minutes to add
during the summertime. The possible offset times are 30, 60, 90,
and 120. The default value is 60.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
nd
To configure daylight savings time on the switch to run from 3PM on Tuesday the 2 of April until 3:30 PM on
nd
Wednesday the 2 of October and add 30 minutes at the onset of DST:

174
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config dst annual s_date 2 s_mth 4 s_time 3 end_date 2

e_mth 10 e_time 3 offset 30
Command: config dst annual s_date 2 s_mth 4 s_time 3 end_date 2 e_mth 10
e_time 3 offset 30

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show time
Purpose To display the current time settings and status.
Syntax show time
Description The show time command displays the system time and date
configuration, as well as displays the current system time.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the time curently set on the switch’s system clock:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show time
Command: show time

Time information
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Current Time Source : Local
Current Time : 09 Jan 2012 15:56:02
GMT Time Zone offset : GMT +02:30
Daylight Saving Time Status : Annual
Offset in Minutes : 60
Annual From : 01 Jan 0:0
To : 01 Jan 0:0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

175
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

29
ARP COMMANDS
The ARP commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in
the following table.

Command Parameter
config arp_aging time <value 0-65535 >
show arpentry { interface_Name {System} | {static} | ip_address <ipaddr>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config arp_aging time

Purpose To configure the age-out timer for ARP table entries on the Switch.
Syntax config arp_aging time <value 0-65535>
Description The config arp_aging time command sets the maximum amount of
time, in minutes, that an ARP entry can remain in the Switch’s ARP
table, without being accessed, before it is dropped from the table.
Parameters time <value 0-65535> – The ARP age-out time, in minutes. The
value may be in the range of 0-65535 minutes, with a default setting
of 20 minutes.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure ARP aging time:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config arp_aging time 30

Command: config arp_aging time 30

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show arpentry
Purpose To displays all ARP entries on the Switch.
Syntax show arpentry { interface_Name {System} | {static} | ip_address
<ipaddr>}
Description The show arpentry command displays all ARP entries on the
Switch.
Parameters interface_name {system} – Displays the interface name of ARP
entry.
ip_address <ipaddr> – Displays the IP address of ARP entry.
Restrictions None.

176
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display all ARP entries on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show arpentry

Command: show arpentry

ARP Aging Time : 30 min

Interface IP Address MAC Address Type

------------- --------------- ----------------- ---------------
System 10.90.90.99 00:11:6b:66:15:e7 dynamic

Total Entries : 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

177
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

30
IPV6 NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY COMMANDS
The IPv6 Neighbor Discovery commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
create ipv6
System <ipv6_addr> <mac_addr>
neighbor_cache ipif
delete ipv6
[<ipv6_addr> | static | dynamic | all]
neighbor_cache
show ipv6
[ipv6address <ipv6_addr> | static | dynamic | all]
neighbor_cache
config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans_time <integer 1-3600>
show ipv6 nd
create ipv6route default <ipv6addr>
delete ipv6route default
show ipv6route
enable
ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
System
disable
ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
System

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif

Purpose Used to add a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Syntax create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System <ipv6_addr>
<mac_addr>
Description This create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif command is used to add a
static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Parameters <ipv6_addr> –The IPv6 address of the neighbor.
<mac_addr> –The MAC address of the neighbor.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To create a static neighbor cache entry on the interface System, with an IPv6 address of 3ffc::1 and a
MAC address of 00:01:02:03:04:05:

178
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00:01:02:03:04:05

Command: create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00:01:02:03:04:05

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete ipv6 neighbor_cache

Purpose Used to remove a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Syntax delete ipv6 neighbor_cache [<ipv6_addr> | static | dynamic | all]
Description This delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif command is used to remove
a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Parameters <ivp6_addr> –The IPv6 address of the neighbor.
static – Delete matching static entries.
dynamic – Delete matching dynamic entries.
all – All entries including static and dynamic entries will be deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a static neighbor cache entry on the interface System, with an IPv6 address of 3ffc::1:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete ipv6 neighbor_cache 3ffc::1

Command: delete ipv6 neighbor_cache 3ffc::1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ipv6 neighbor_cache

Purpose Used to display the IPv6 neighbor cache.
Syntax show ipv6 neighbor_cache [ipv6address <ipv6_addr> | static |
dynamic | all]
Description This show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif command is used to display
the neighbor cache entry for the specified interface. You can display
a specific entry, all static entries, all dynamic entries, or all entries.
Parameters ipv6address <ipv6_addr> –The IPv6 address of the neighbor.
static – Display all static neighbor cache entries.
dynamic – Display all dynamic entries.
all – Displays all entries including static and dynamic entries.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show all neighbor cache entries on the switch:

179
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif all static

Command: show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif all static

IPv6 Address Link-layer Addr State Interface

------------------- ---------------------- --------- ---------

Total Entries: 0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config ipv6 nd ns ipif

Purpose Configures the IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation retransmission time.
This is the time between the retransmission of neighbor solicitation
messages to a neighbor, when either resolving the address or
probing the reachability of a neighbor.
Syntax config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans_time <integer 1-3600>
Description This config ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif command is used to
configures the retransmit time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation
Parameters retrans_time <integer 1 - 3600> – Neighbor solicitation’s retransmit
timer is in milliseconds. It has the same value as the RA
retrans_time in the config IPv6 ND RA command. If the retrans_time
parameter is configured in one of the commands, the retrans_time
value in the other command will also change so that the values in
both commands are the same. The range is 1 to 3600.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the retrans_time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation to be 100:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans_time 100

Command: config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans_time 100

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ipv6 nd
Purpose Used to display information regarding neighbor detection on the
switch.
Syntax show ipv6 nd
Description This show ipv6 nd command is used to display information
regarding neighbor detection on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

180
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To show IPv6 ND related configuration:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ipv6 nd

Command: show ipv6 nd

Interface Name : System

NS Retransmit Time : 1(ms)

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create ipv6route default

Purpose Used to create IPv6 route entries to the switch’s IP routing table.
Syntax create ipv6route default <ipv6addr>
Description This create ipv6route default command is used to create a primary
and backup IP route entry to the switch’s IP routing table.
Parameters <ipv6addr> – Specify the IPv6 address to be created.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To add a single static IPv6 entry in IPv6 format:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create ipv6route default 3ffc::1

Command: create ipv6route default 3ffc::1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete ipv6route default

Purpose Used to delete a static IPv6 route entry from the switch’s IP routing
table.
Syntax delete ipv6route default
Description This delete ipv6route default command will delete an existing static
IPv6 entry from the switch’s IP routing table.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a static IPv6 entry from the routing table:

181
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete ipv6route default

Command: delete ipv6route default

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ipv6route
Purpose Used to display IPv6 routes.
Syntax show ipv6route
Description This show ipv6route command displays the IPv6 routes.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show IPv6 route:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ipv6route

Command: show ipv6route

Prefix Next Hop IP Interface Protocol

Metric
------ -------- ------------ --------
------
::/0 3ffc::1 System Static
1

Total Entries: 1

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Purpose Used to enable the auto configuration of the link local address when
no IPv6 address is configured.
Syntax enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Description This enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System command will
automatically create an IPv6 link local address for the Switch if no
IPv6 address has previously been configured.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the IP interface IPv6 link-local settings on the switch:

182
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Command: enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Purpose Used to disable the auto configuration of the IPv6 link local address.
Syntax disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System
Description This disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System command will
disable the automatic creation of an IPv6 link local address for the
Switch. Once this command is entered, any previous IPv6 link local
address that has been created for the IP interface selected, will be
deleted from the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable the IP interface IPv6 link-local settings on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Command: disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto System

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

183
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

31
BANNER COMMANDS
The Banner commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters)
in the following table.

Command Parameter
config log_save_timing [log_trigger | on_demand | time_interval <min 1-65535>]

show log

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config log_save_timing
Purpose Used to configure the method of saving logs to the switch’s flash
memory.
Syntax config log_save_timing [log_trigger | on_demand | time_interval
<min 1-65535>]
Description This config log_save_timing command is used to configure the
method used in saving logs to the switch’s flash memory.
Parameters log_trigger – Users who choose this method will have logs saved to
the switch every time a log event occurs on the switch.
on_demand – Users who choose this method will only save logs
when they manually tell the Switch to do so, using the save all or
save log command.
time_interval <min 1-65535>– Use this parameter to configure the
time interval that will be implemented for saving logs. The logs will
be saved every x number of minutes that are configured here.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the time interval as every 30 minutes for saving logs:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config log_save_timing time_interval 30

Command: config log_save_timing time_interval 30

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

184
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show log
Purpose Used to show the login banner.
Syntax show log
Description This command allows display of the log.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Usage Example:
To show the log on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show log

Command: show log

Index Time Log Text

------ -------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Jan 1 00:01:13 2012:CLI-6:Successful login through console port( User:
root )
1 Jan 1 00:00:18 2012:SYSTEM-2:System started up

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

185
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

32
COMMAND HISTORY LIST COMMANDS
The Command History List commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
?

show
command_history

dir

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

?
Purpose To display all commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Syntax ?
Description The ? command displays all of the commands available through the
Command Line Interface (CLI).
Parameters {<command>} – Lists all the corresponding parameters for the
specified command, along with a brief description of the command’s
function and similar commands having the same words in the
command.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display all of the commands in the CLI:

186
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> ?
Command: ?

USEREXEC commands :
? {<command>}
cable diagnostic port [<portlist 1-10> | all]
clear
clear counters ports <portlist 1-10>
clear ethernet_oam ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] {[ event_log | statistics]}
clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 20> | port <port 1-10> | all]
clear log
clear port_security_entry port <portlist 1-10>
cmdebug flag ([ip] [icmp] [udp] [rarp] ) {enable| disable}
cmdebug flag fdb ([img] [info] [runtime]) {enable| disable}
cmdebug flag led ([read] [write] [debug] [cli] [watchdog] [path] [error])
{enable|
disable}
cmdebug killme
cmdebug lock msg
cmdebug memory
cmdebug multicast dump
cmdebug private inter mib { enable | disable}
cmdebug sem
cmdebug sig <pid> <sig_id>
cmdebug sli <integer(0-2048)>
cmdebug syscall <command1> [<command2>] [<command3>]
cmdebug task <integer(1-200)> pri <integer(1-99)>
cmdebug tcp <tcb-dump|tcp-trace> <integer(0-2048)>
cmdebug timing add <tag (32)>
cmdebug timing clear
cmdebug timing dump [<tag (32)>]
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a ALL

show command_history
Purpose To display the command history.
Syntax show command_history
Description The show command_history command displays the command
history.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

187
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To display the command history:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show command_history
Command: show command_history

?
show log
show log_save_timing
show log_save_timing

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

dir
Purpose To display all commands.
Syntax dir
Description The dir command displays all commands.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display all of the commands:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> dir

Available commands :
? cable clear cmdebug
compute config create debug
delete disable download echo
enable logout npapi ping
ping6 reboot reset rpc
save show traceroute upload

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

188
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

33
ACCESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDS
The Access Authentication Control commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the
appropriate parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
create authen_login
<string 15>
method_list_name
[default | method_list_name <string 15>] method [ radius | local | server_group
config authen_login
<string 15> | none]
delete authen_login
<string 15>
method_list_name
show authen_login [all | default | method_list_name <string 15>]
create authen_enable
<string 15>
method_list_name
[default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {radius | local | server_group
config authen_enable
<string 15> | none}
delete authen_enable
<string 15>
method_list_name
show authen_enable [all | default | method_list_name <string 15>]

enable authen_policy

disable authen_policy

show authen_policy

config authen
[console | http | all] [login | enable] [default | method_list_name <string 15>]
application
show authen
application
config authen
[attempt <int 1-255> | response_timeout <int 0-255>]
parameter
show authen
parameter
create authen [<ipaddr>| <ipv6addr>] protocol radius {port <int 1-65535> | key <string 254> |
server_host timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
config authen [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol radius {port <int 1-65535> | key [<string 254>] |
server_host timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
delete authen
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol radius
server_host
show authen
server_host

create authen <string 15>

189
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Command Parameter
server_group
config authen [<string 15> | radius] [add | delete] server_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol
server_group radius
delete authen
<string 15>
server_group
show authen
{<string 15>}
server_group
enable admin

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

create authen_login method_list_name

Purpose To create a user-defined list of authentication methods for users
logging on to the Switch.
Syntax create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Description The create authen_login method_list_name command creates a
list of authentication techniques for the user to login. The Switch can
support up to eight method lists, but one is reserved as a default and
cannot be deleted. Multiple method lists must be created and
configured separately.
Parameters <string 15> - Defines the method_list_name to be created as a string
of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create the method list ‘Trinity’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create authen_login method_list_name Trinity

Command: create authen_login method_list_name Trinity

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen_login
Purpose To configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication
methods for user login.
Syntax config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>]
method [radius | local | server_group <string 15> | none]
Description The config authen_login command configures a user-defined or
default method list of authentication methods for users logging on to
the switch. The sequence of methods implemented in this command
affects the authentication result. For example, if a user enters a
sequence of methods like tacacs – local, the switch sends an
authentication request to the first tacacs host in the server group. If
no response comes from the server host, the switch sends an
190
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

authentication request to the second tacacs host in the server group

and so on, until the list is exhausted. When the local method is used,
the privilege level is dependant on the local account privilege
configured on the Switch.
Successful login using any of these methods gives the user a ‘user’
priviledge only. If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the
administrator level, the user must implement the enable admin
command, followed by a previously configured password. (See the
enable admin part of this section for more detailed information,
concerning the enable admin command.)
Parameters default – The default method list for access authentication, as
defined by the user. The user may choose one or more of the
following authentication methods:
 radius - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts
of the RADIUS server group list.
 local - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the local user account database on the Switch.
 server_group <string 15> –Specifies that the user is to be
authenticated using the server group account database on
the Switch.
 none – Specifies that no authentication is required to
access the Switch.
method_list_name <string 15> – Specifies a previously created
method list name defined by the user. One or more of the following
authentication methods may be added to this method list:
 radius - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server.
 local - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the local user account database on the switch.
 server_group <string 15> –Specifies that the user is to be
authenticated using the server group account database on
the switch.
 none – Specifies that no authentication is required to
access the switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the user defined method list ‘Trinity’ with authentication methods RADIUS and local, in that
order.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config authen_login method_list_name Trinity method radius local

Command: config authen_login method_list_name Trinity method radius local

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete authen_login method_list_name

Purpose To delete a previously configured user defined list of authentication
methods for users logging on to the Switch.
Syntax delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>

191
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The delete authen_login method_list_name command deletes a

list of authentication methods for user login.
Parameters <string 15> - The previously created method_list_name to delete.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the method list name ‘Trinity’:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete authen_login method_list_name Trinity

Command: delete authen_login method_list_name Trinity

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen_login
Purpose To display a previously configured user defined method list of
authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch.
Syntax show authen_login [all | default | method_list_name <string
15>]
Description The show authen_login command displays a list of authentication
methods for user login.
Parameters default – Displays the default method list for users logging on to the
switch.
method_list_name <string 15> - Specifies the method_list_name to
display.
all – Displays all the authentication login methods currently
configured on the switch.
• Method List Name – The name of a previously configured
method list name.
• Method Name – Defines which security protocols are
implemeted, per method list name.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view all authentication login method list names:

192
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show authen_login all

Command: show authen_login all

Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment

-------------------------- ----------- -------------------- ------------------
Trinity 1 none Keyword
Trinity 2 none Keyword
Trinity 3 none Keyword
Trinity 4 none Keyword

-------------------------- ----------- -------------------- ------------------

default 1 local Keyword
default 2 none Keyword
default 3 none Keyword
default 4 none Keyword

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create authen_enable method_list_name

Purpose To create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for
promoting normal user level privileges to administrator level
privileges on the switch.
Syntax create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Description The create authen_enable method_list_name command creates a
list of authentication methods for promoting users with normal level
privileges to administrator level privileges using authentication
methods on the Switch. Once a user acquires normal user level
privileges on the switch, he or she must be authenticated by a
method on the switch to gain administrator privileges on the switch,
which is defined by the administrator. A maximum of eight (8) enable
method lists can be implemented on the switch.
Parameters <string 15> - Defines the authen_enable method_list_name to be
created as a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a user-defined method list, named ‘Permit’ for promoting user privileges to adminstrator privileges:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create authen_enable method_list_name Permit

Command: create authen_enable method_list_name Permit

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen_enable
Purpose To configure a user-defined method list of authentication methods
for promoting normal user level privileges to administrator level
193
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

privileges on the Switch.

Syntax config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>]
method {radius | local | server_group <string 15> | none}
Description The config authen_enable command configures a user-defined list
of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges
to administrator level privileges using authentication methods on the
switch. Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the
switch, he or she must be authenticated by a method on the switch
in order to gain administrator privileges. This is defined by the
administrator. A maximum of eight (8) enable method lists can be
implemented simultaneously on the switch.
The sequence of methods implemented in this command affects the
authentication result. For example, if a user enters a sequence of
methods like radius – local_enable, the switch sends an
authentication request to the first RADIUS host in the server group.
If no verification is found, the switch sends an authentication request
to the second RADIUS host in the server group and so on, until the
list is exhausted. At that point, the switch restarts the same
sequence with the following protocol listed, radius. If no
authentication takes place using the radius list, the local_enable
password set in the switch is used to authenticate the user.
Successful authentication using any of these methods gives the user
an ‘Admin’ level privilege.
Parameters default – The default method list for adminstration rights
authentication, as defined by the user. The user may choose one or
more of the following authentication methods:
• radius – Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts
of the RADIUS server group list.
• local - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the local user account database on the switch.
• server_group <string 15> – Specifies the server group name
for authentication.
• none – Specifies that no authentication is required to access
the switch.
method_list_name <string 15> – Specifies a previously created
authen_enable method_list_name. The user may add one or more
of the following authentication methods to this method list:
• radius - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server.
• local - Specifies that the user is to be authenticated using
the local user account database on the switch. The local
enable password of the device can be configured using the
‘config admin local_password’ command.
• server_group <string 15> –Specifies that the user is to be
authenticated using the server group account database on
the switch.
• none – Specifies that no authentication is required to access
the switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

194
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure the user defined method list ‘Permit’ with authentication methods RADIUS and
local_enable, in that order.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config authen_enable method_list_name Trinity method

radius local
Command: config authen_enable method_list_name Trinity method radius local

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete authen_enable method_list_name

Purpose To delete a user-defined list of authentication methods for promoting
normal user level privileges to administrator level privileges on the
switch.
Syntax delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Description The delete authen_enable method_list_name command deletes a
user-defined list of authentication methods for promoting user level
privileges to adminstrator level privileges.
Parameters <string 15> - The previously created authen_enable
method_list_name to be deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete the user-defined method list ‘Permit’

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete authen_enable method_list_name Permit

Command: delete authen_enable method_list_name Permit

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen_enable
Purpose To display the list of authentication methods for promoting normal
user level privileges to administrator level privileges on the switch.
Syntax show authen_enable [all | default | method_list_name <string
15>]
Description The show authen_enable command deletes a user-defined list of
authentication methods for promoting user level privileges to
adminstrator level privileges.
Parameters default – Displays the default method list for users attempting to gain
access to administrator level privileges on the switch.
method_list_name <string 15> – The method_list_name to be
displayed.
all – Displays all the authentication login methods currently
configured on the switch.
The command displays the following parameters:

195
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

• Method List Name – The name of a previously configured

method list name.
• Method Name – Defines which security protocols are
implemeted, per method list name.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display all method lists for promoting user level privileges to administrator level privileges.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show authen_enable all

Command: show authen_enable all

Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment

------------------------ -------- ------------------- ------------------
default 1 local Keyword

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable authen_policy
Purpose To enable the authentication policy on the Switch.
Syntax enable authen_policy
Description The enable authen_policy command enables the authentication
policy on the Switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only Administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To enable the authentication policy:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable authen_policy
Command: enable authen_policy

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable authen_policy
Purpose To disable the authentication policy on the switch.
Syntax disable authen_policy
Description The disable authen_policy command disables the authentication
policy on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

196
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To disable the authentication policy:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable authen_policy
Command: disable authen_policy

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen_policy
Purpose Used to display the system access authentication policy status on
the switch.
Syntax show authen_policy
Description The show authen_policy command displays the system access
authentication policy status on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the system access authentication policy:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show authen_policy
Command: show authen_policy

Authentication Policy : Disabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen application

Purpose To configure various applications on the switch for authentication
using a previously configured method list.
Syntax config authen application [console | http | all] [login | enable]
[default | method_list_name <string 15>]
Description The config authen application command configures switch
applications (console, Telnet) for login at the user level and at the
administration level (authen_enable), utilizing a previously
configured method list.
Parameters application – Specifies the application to configure. One of the
following four options may be selected:
• console – Configures the command line interface login
method.
• http – Configures the http login method.
• all – Configures all applications as (console, Telnet, SSH)
login methods.
login – Configures an application for normal login on the user level,
using a previously configured method list.
enable – Configures an application for upgrading a normal user level

197
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

to administrator privileges, using a previously configured method list.

default – Configures an application for user authentication using the
default method list.
method_list_name <string 15> – Configures an application for user
authentication using a previously configured method_list_name.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the default method list for the command line interface:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config authen application http login default

Command: config authen application http login default

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen application

Purpose To display authentication methods for the various applications on the
switch.
Syntax show authen application
Description The show authen application command displays all of the
authentication method lists (login, enable administrator privileges)
for switch configuration applications (console, Telnet, SSH) currently
configured on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the login and enable method list for all applications on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show authen application

Command: show authen application

Application Login Method List Enable Method List

--------------- --------------------------- ------------------------------
Telnet default default
HTTP default default

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen parameter

Purpose To enable the user to configure the authentication parameters on the
Switch.
Syntax config authen parameter [attempt <int 1-255> |
response_timeout <int 0-255>]

198
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The config authen parameter attempt command enables to user

to configure authentication parameters on the Switch.
Parameters attemtp <integer 1-255> – Specifies the attempt of authentication
parameter on the Switch. The value range is between 1 and 255.
response_timout <integer 0-255> – Specifies the response timout of
authentication parameter on the Switch. The value range is between
0 and 255.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the default method list for the command line interface:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config authen parameter attempt 10

Command: config authen parameter attempt 10

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen parameter

Purpose To display authentication parameters for the various applications on
the switch.
Syntax show authen parameter
Description The show authen parameter command displays the authentication
parameter on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the authentication parameters for all applications on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show authen parameter

Command: show authen parameter

Response Timeout : 30 seconds

User Attempts : 10 times
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

create authen server_host

Purpose To create an authentication server host.
Syntax create authen server_host [<ipaddr>| <ipv6addr>] protocol
radius {port <int 1-65535> | key <string 254> | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
Description The create authen server_host command creates an
authentication server host for the RADIUS security protocols on the
switch. When a user attempts to access the switch with
authentication protocol enabled, the switch sends authentication
199
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

packets to a remote RADIUS server host on a remote host. The

RADIUS server host then verifies or denies the request and returns
the appropriate message to the switch. More than one authentication
protocol can be run on the same physical server host but, remember
that RADIUS has separate entities that are not compatible with each
other. The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16.
Parameters <ipaddr> – The IPv4 address of the remote server host to add.
<ipv6addr> – The IPv6 address of the remote server host to add.
protocol radius – Specifies that the server host utilizes the RADIUS
protocol.
port <int 1-65535> – The virtual port number of the authentication
protocol on a server host. The value must be between 1 and 65535.
The default port numbers are 1812 and 1813 for RADIUS servers
but the user may set a unique port number for higher security.
key [<string 254>] – The authentication key can only be shared with
a configured RADIUS server. The value is a string of up to 254
alphanumeric characters.
timeout <int 1-255> – The time in seconds the switch waits for the
server host to reply to an authentication request. The default value is
5 seconds.
retransmit <int 1-255> – The number of times the device resends an
authentication request when the server does not respond. The value
is between 1 and 255.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a RADIUS authentication server host, with port number 1234, a timeout value of 10 seconds
and a retransmit count of 5.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> create authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius port

1234 timeout 10 retransmit 5
Command: create authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius port 1234
timeout10 retransmit 5

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen server_host

Purpose To configure a user-defined authentication server host.
Syntax config authen server_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol
radius {port <int 1-65535> | key [<string 254>] | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-255>}
Description The config authen server_host command configures a user-
defined authentication server host for the RADIUS security protocols
on the switch. When a user attempts to access the switch with the
authentication protocol enabled, the switch sends authentication
packets to a remote RADIUS server host on a remote host. The
RADIUS server host then verifies or denies the request and returns
the appropriate message to the switch. More than one authentication
protocol can be run on the same physical server host but, remember
that RADIUS is separate entities and are not compatible with each

200
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

other. The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16.

Parameters <ipaddr> – The IPv4 address of the remote server host the user
wishes to alter.
<ipv6addr> – The IPv6 address of the remote server host the user
wishes to alter.
protocol radius – Specifies that the server host utilizes the RADIUS
protocol.
port <int 1-65535> – The virtual port number of the authentication
protocol on a server host. The value must be between 1 and 65535.
The default port numbers are 1812 and 1813 for RADIUS servers
but the user may set a unique port number for higher security.
key [<string 254>] – The authentication key to be shared with a
configured RADIUS server only. The value is a string of up to 254
alphanumeric characters.
timeout <int 1-255> – The time in seconds the switch will wait for the
server host to reply to an authentication request. The default value is
5 seconds.
retransmit <int 1-255> – The number of times the device resends an
authentication request when the server does not respond. The value
is between 1 and 255.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure a RADIUS authentication server host, with port number 4321, a timeout value of 12
seconds and a retransmit count of 4.

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius port

4321 timeout 12 retransmit 4
Command: config authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius port 4321
timeout 12 retransmit 4

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete authen server_host

Purpose To delete a user-defined authentication server host.
Syntax delete authen server_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol
radius
Description The delete authen server_host command deletes a user-defined
authentication server host previously created on the switch.
Parameters <ipaddr> - The IPv4 address of the remote server host to be deleted.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the remote server host to be
deleted.
protocol radius – Specifies that the server host utilizes the RADIUS
protocol.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

201
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To delete a user-defined RADIUS authentication server host:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius

Command: delete authen server_host 10.1.1.121 protocol radius

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen server_host

Purpose To view a user-defined authentication server host.
Syntax show authen server_host
Description The show authen server_host command displays user-defined
authentication server hosts previously created on the switch.
The following parameters are displayed:
IP Address – The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the authentication server
host.
Protocol – The protocol used by the server host.
Port – The virtual port number on the server host. The default value
is 49.
Timeout - The time in seconds the switch will wait for the server host
to reply to an authentication request.
Retransmit - The value in the retransmit field denotes how many
times the device resends an authentication request.
Key - Authentication key to be shared with a configured RADIUS
server only.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To view authenticaion server hosts currently set on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show authen server_host

Command: show authen server_host

IP Address : 10.90.90.97
Protocol : radius
Port : 10
Timeout :2
Retransmit :5
Key : kdjfl

Total Entries: 1
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

202
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

create authen server_group

Purpose To create an authentication server host.
Syntax create authen server_group <string 15>
Description The create authen server_ group command creates an
authentication server group for the protocols on the switch.
Parameters <string 15> – Defines the authentication group name as a string of
up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To create a server group “dlinkgroup”:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>create authen server_group dlinkgroup

Command: create authen server_group dlinkgroup

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config authen server_group

Purpose To configure a user-defined authentication server host.
Syntax config authen server_group [<string 15> | radius] [add | delete]
server_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] protocol radius
Description The config authen server_ group command configures a user-
defined authentication server group for the RADIUS security
protocols on the switch. When a user attempts to access the switch
with the authentication protocol enabled, the switch sends
authentication packets to a remote RADIUS server group on a
remote host. The RADIUS server group then verifies or denies the
request and returns the appropriate message to the Switch. More
than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical
server host but, remember that RADIUS has separate entities that
are not compatible with each other. The maximum supported
number of server group is 16.
Parameters <string 15> – Defines the authentication group name as a string of
up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
<ipaddr> – The IPv4 address of the remote server group the user
wishes to alter.
<ipv6addr> – The IPv6 address of the remote server group the user
wishes to alter.
[add | delete] –Specifies if the authentication server host will be
added or deleted from the server group.
protocol radius – Specifies that the server host utilizes the RADIUS
protocol.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

203
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure a RADIUS authentication server group:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config authen server_group dlinkgroup add server_host

10.1.1.121 protocol radius
Command: config authen server_group dlinkgroup add server_host 10.1.1.121
protocol radius

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

delete authen server_group

Purpose To delete a user-defined authentication server host.
Syntax delete authen server_group <string 15>
Description The delete authen server_ group command deletes a user-defined
authentication server group previously created on the switch.
Parameters <string 15> –Specifies the authentication server group name to be
deleted.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To delete a user-defined rd1 authentication server group:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>delete authen server_group dlinkgroup

Command: delete authen server_group dlinkgroup

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show authen server_group

Purpose To view a user-defined authentication server group.
Syntax show authen server_group {<string 15>}
Description The show authen server_ group command displays user-defined
authentication server groups previously created on the switch.
The following parameters are displayed:
Group Name – The name of the server group.
IP Address – The IP address of the authentication server group.
Protocol – The protocol used by the server group.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

204
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To view authenticaion server hosts currently set on the Switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show authen server_group

Command: show authen server_group

Group Name : radius

IP Address : 10.90.90.97
Protocol : radius

Group Name : dlinkgroup

Total Entries: 2
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

enable admin
Purpose To promote user level privileges up to administrator level privileges.
Syntax enable admin
Description The enable admin command enables a user to be granted
administrative privileges on to the switch. After logging on to the
switch, users have only ‘user’ level privileges. To gain access to
administrator level privileges, the user may enter this command. The
system then prompts for an authentication password. Possible
authentication methods for this function include TACACS, RADIUS,
user defined server groups, local enable (local account on the
Switch), or no authentication (none). Because TACACS does not
support the enable function, the user must create a special account
on the server host which has the username ‘enable’, and a
password configured by the administrator that will support the
‘enable’ function. This function becomes inoperable when the
authentication policy is disabled.
Parameters None.
Restrictions Only administrator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable administrator privileges on the switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable admin
Command: enable admin

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

205
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

34
POWER SAVING COMMANDS
The Power Saving commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config power_saving mode [hibernation | led | length_detection | port] [enable | disable]
[hibernation | led [all | <portlist>] | port [all | <portlist 1-10>]] [add | delete]
config power_saving time_range1 <range_name 20> time_range2 <range_name 20>
{clear_time_range}
show power_saving {hibernation | led | length_detection | port}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config power_saving mode

Purpose To configure the power saving mode on the switch.
Syntax config power_saving mode [hibernation | led | length_detection
| port] [enable | disable]
Description The config power_saving mode command is used to configure the
power saving mode on the switch.
Parameters hibernation – Configure the hibernation state to enable or disable.
The default value is disabled.
led – Configure the led state to enable or disable. The default value
is disabled.
length_detection – Configure the length detection state to enable or
disable. The default value is disabled.
port – Configure ports state to be enabled or disabled.
[enable | disable] – Enable or disable the power saving feature.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the power saving mode on the switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config power_saving mode port hibernation enable
Command: config power_saving mode port hibernation enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config power_saving
Purpose To configure the power saving on the switch.

206
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Syntax config power_saving [hibernation | led [all | <portlist 1-10>] |

port [all | <portlist>]] [add | delete] time_range1 <range_name
20> time_range2 <range_name 20> {clear_time_range}
Description The config power_saving command is used to configure the power
saving on the switch.
Parameters hibernation – Configure the hibernation.
led [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Configure the ports for led.
port – Configure ports.
[add | delete] – Add or delete time range for power saving mode.
time_range1 <range_name 20> – Specifies the time range 1 to be
configured.
time_range2 <range_name 20> – Specifies the time range 2 to be
configured.
{clear_time_range} – Clear the time range setting for power saving
on the Switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure power saving on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config power_saving mode port hibernation enable

Command: config power_saving mode port hibernation enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show power_saving
Purpose To display power saving information on the switch.
Syntax show power_saving {hibernation | led | length_detection | port}
Description The show power_saving is used to display power saving
information.
Parameters hibernation – Display the hibernation state.
led –Display the led state.
length_detection –Display the length detection state.
port –Display ports state.
Restrictions None.
Example usage:
To display power saving information on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show power_saving length_detection

Command: show power_saving length_detection

Length Detection State : Enabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

207
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

35
LLDP COMMANDS
The LLDP commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in
the following table.

Command Parameter
enable lldp
disable lldp
config lldp
<sec 5-32768>
message_tx_interval
config lldp
<int 2-10>
message_tx_hold_multiplier
config lldp reinit_delay <sec 1-10>
config lldp tx_delay <sec 1-8192>
show lldp
show lldp ports {<portlist 1-10>}
show lldp local_ports {<portlist 1-10>} {mode[brief | normal | detailed]}
show lldp remote_ports {<portlist 1-10>} {mode[brief | normal | detailed]}
config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] notification [enable | disable]
config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable]
[<portlist 1-10>|all] mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr>| ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable |
config lldp ports
disable]
[<portlist 1-10>|all] basic_tlvs [all | {port_description | system_name |
config lldp ports
system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable]
[<portlist 1-10>|all] dot3_tlvs [all | link aggregation |
config lldp ports
mac_phy_configuration_status | maximum_frame_size] [enable | disable]
config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_pvid [disable | enable]
config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_protocol_identity eapol [disable | enable]
[<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [<vlan_name 20> | all] | vlanid <vidlist
config lldp ports 1-4094>] [disable | enable]

show lldp mgt_addr {ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>}

show lldp statistics {ports <portlist 1-10>}

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

enable lldp
Purpose To enable LLDP on the switch.
Syntax enable lldp

208
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Description The enable lldp command enables the Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP) on the switch.
Parameters None
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable LLDP on the switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>enable lldp
Command: enable lldp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

disable lldp
Purpose To disable LLDP on the switch.
Syntax disable lldp
Description The disable lldp command disables the Link Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) on the switch.
Parameters None
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To disable LLDP on the switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>disable lldp
Command: disable lldp

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp message_tx_interval

Purpose To define the lldp message tx interval
Syntax config lldp message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768>
Description The config lldp message_tx_interval defines the lldp message
interval of the incoming messages.
Parameters <sec 5-32768> – Defines the message interval time. The range is
between 5 and 32768.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP message tx interval on the switch:

209
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp message_tx_interval 10

Command: config lldp message_tx_interval 10

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier

Purpose To define the lldp hold-multiplier on the switch.
Syntax config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10>
Description The config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier command specifies
the amount of time the receiving device should hold a Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP) packet before discarding it.
Parameters message_tx_hold_multiplier (int 2-10) – Specifies the hold time to be
sent in the LLDP update packets as a multiple of the timer value.
(Range: 2-10). The default configuration is 4.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure LLDP Message tx hold multiplier settings:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier 2
Command: config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier 2

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp reinit_delay

Purpose To define the lldp reinint–delay on the switch.
Syntax config lldp reinit_delay <sec 1-10>
Description The lldp reinit_delay seconds command specifies the minimum
time an LLDP port will wait before reinitializing LLDP transmission.
Parameters <sec 1-10> – Specifies the minimum time in seconds an LLDP port
will wait before reinitializing LLDP transmission. The range is 1 – 10
seconds. The default configuration is 2 seconds.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator–level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP reinit delay:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp reinit_delay 1
Command: config lldp reinit_delay 1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

210
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config lldp tx_delay

Purpose To configure the lldp tx_delay on the switch.
Syntax config lldp tx_delay <sec 1-8192>
Description The config lldp tx_delay command specifies the delay between
successive LLDP frame transmissions initiated by value/status
changes in the LLDP local systems MIB, use the lldp tx_delay
command in global configuration mode.
Parameters <sec 1-8192> – Specifies the minimum time in seconds an LLDP
port will wait before reinitializing LLDP transmission. The range is
1 – 8192 seconds. The default configuration is 2 seconds.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP tx delay:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp tx_delay 1
Command: config lldp tx_delay 1

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp
Purpose To display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) on the switch.
Syntax show lldp
Description The show lldp displays the LLDP configuration on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show LLDP settings:

211
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show lldp

Command: show lldp

LLDP System Information

--------------------------------------------------------------
Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : DE-AD-BE-EF-01-02
System Name :
System Description : DGS-1100-10/ME V1.00.002
System Capabilities : bridge

LLDP Configurations
-------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP Status : Enabled
Message Tx Interval : 10
Message Tx Hold Multiplier : 2
ReInit Delay :2
Tx Delay :2
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp ports

Purpose To display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ports
configuration on the switch.
Syntax show lldp ports {<portlist 1-10>}
Description The show lldp ports command displays the information regarding
the ports.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To show the information for port 1:

212
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show lldp ports 1

Command: show lldp ports 1

Port ID :1
-------------------------------------------------------------
Admin Status : TX_and_RX
Notification Status : Disabled
Advertised TLVs Option :
Port Description Disabled
System Name Disabled
System Description Disabled
System Capabilitiess Disabled
Enabled Management Address
<None>
Port VLAN ID Disabled
Enabled VLAN Name
<None>
Enabled Protocol_Identity
<None>
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Disabled
Maximum Frame Size Disabled

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp local_ports

Purpose To display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration
that is advertised from a specific port.
Syntax show lldp local_ports {<portlist 1-10>} {mode[brief | normal |
detailed]}
Description The show lldp local_ports command displays the configuration that
is advertised from a specific port.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be displayed.
{mode[brief | normal | detailed]} − defines which mode of information
want to be displayed, brief, normal or detailed.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To show the local port information for port 1 with mode brief:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show lldp local_ports 1 mode brief
Command: show lldp local_ports 1 mode brief

Port ID : 1
------------------------------------------
Port Id Subtype : Interface Alias
Port Id : Fa0/1
Port Description :

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp remote_ports

Purpose To display information regarding the neighboring devices discovered

213
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

using LLDP.
Syntax show lldp remote_ports {<portlist 1-10>} {mode[brief | normal |
detailed]}
Description The show lldp remote_ports command displays the information
regarding neighboring devices.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> − A port or range of ports to be displayed.
[mode[brief | normal | detailed]} − defines which mode of information
users want to be displayed, brief, normal or detailed.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To show the information for remote ports:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show lldp remote_ports 1 mode normal
Command: show lldp remote_ports 1 mode normal

Port ID : 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 0
(NONE)

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To enable LLDP notification on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] notification [enable |
disable]
Description The config lldp ports notification command defines lldp notification
per port on the switch.
Parameters ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
notification [enable | disable]– defines is notification is enabled or
disabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-evel users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure LLDP notification:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports 1-3 notification enable
Command: config lldp ports 1-3 notification enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP admin status on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10> | all] admin_status [tx_only |
rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable]
Description The config lldp ports admin status command defines lldp admin
status per port on the switch.

214
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters [<portlist> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.

Admin status – defines admin status of ports on the switch
Tx- Tx only
Rx – Rx only
Both – Tx and RX
Disable – admin status disabled.

Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP admin status
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports 2 admin_status disable
Command: config lldp ports 2 admin_status disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management address advertisement on a port or
ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr>|
ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable]
Description The config lldp ports mgt_addr command defines if lldp will
advertise the switch’s IP address the command is per port on the
switch.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] – defines wether the
management address (IPv4 or IPv6 address) advertisement will be
enabled or disabled
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP management address advertisement
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports 1 mgt_addr ipv4 100.1.1.2 enabled
Command: config lldp ports 1 mgt_addr ipv4 100.1.1.2 enabled

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management basic TLVs advertisement on a port or
ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] basic_tlvs [all |
{port_description | system_name | system_description |
system_capabilities}] [enable | disable]
Description The config lldp ports basic TLVs command defines if lldp will
advertise the switch’s basic TLVs the command is per port on the

215
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

switch.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
Basic TLVs:
all – advertisement of all the basic TLVs
port description – advertisement of Port description
system name – advertisement of system name
system description – advertisement of System description
system capabilities – advertisement of system capabilities
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP Basis TLVs
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports 1 basic_tlvs all enable
Command: config lldp ports 1 basic_tlvs all enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management basic TLVs advertisement on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist>|all] dot3_tlvs [all | link aggregation |
mac_phy_configuration_status | maximum_frame_size] [enable |
disable]
Description The config lldp ports dot3 TLVs command defines if lldp will advertise the
mac_phy_configuration_status. The command is per port on the switch.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
dot3_tlvs – defines if the advertisement is enabled or disabled. The possible
values are: link_aggregation, mac_phy_configuration_status,
maximum_frame_size or all.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP mac_phy_configuration status:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports 2 dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status
enable
Command: config lldp ports 2 dot3_tlvsmac_phy_configuration_status enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management basic TLVs advertisement on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_pvid [disable | enable]
Description The config lldp ports dot1 TLVs command defines if lldp will advertise the
mac_phy_configuration_status. The command is per port on the switch.

216
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.

[enable | disable] - Defines if the advertisement is enabled or disabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP TLV PVID:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid disable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_pvid disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management basic TLVs advertisement on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_protocol_identity eapol
[disable | enable]
Description The config lldp ports dot1 TLVs command defines if lldp will advertise the
mac_phy_configuration_status. The command is per port on the switch.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
dot1_tlv_protocol_identity − Defines if the advertisement is enabled or
disabled. The possible value is eapol.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure LLDP ports configuration status:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity eapol enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity eapol enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config lldp ports

Purpose To define LLDP management basic TLVs advertisement on a port or ports.
Syntax config lldp ports [<portlist 1-10>|all] dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan
[<vlan_name 20> | all] | vlanid <vidlist 1-4094>] [disable | enable]
Description The config lldp ports dot1 TLVs command defines lldp admin status per
port on the switch.
Parameters [<portlist 1-10> | all] – Specify a port or ports to be configured.
vlan [<vlan_name 20> | all] –The name of the VLAN to be configured.
dot1_tlv_vlan_name − Defines if the advertisement is enabled or disabled.
vlanid <vidlist 1-4094> –The vid of the VLAN to be configured.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

217
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To configure LLDP mac_phy_configuration status:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1 disable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1 disable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp mgt_addr

Purpose To display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration
that is advertised from a specific port.
Syntax show lldp mgt_addr {ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>}
Description The show lldp mgt_addr command displays the information
regarding the IPv4 or IPv6 address.
Parameters ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr> – Specifies the lldp IPv4 or IPv6
address to be displayed.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the LLDP management address advertisement:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show lldp mgt_addr
Command: show lldp mgt_addr

Address : 1
-----------------------------------------------
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : ifIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1
Advertising Ports : <NONE>

Address : 2
-----------------------------------------------
Subtype : IPv6
Address : fe80::dcad:beff:feef:102
IF Type : ifIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1
Advertising Ports : <NONE>

Total Address : 2
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show lldp statistics

Purpose To display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) statistics for the
specified ports.
Syntax show lldp statistics {ports <portlist 1-10>}
Description The show lldp statistics command displays the statistics of LLDP
on the switch.

218
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Parameters {ports <portlist 1-10> – Specifies the ports to be displayed.

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show the LLDP statistics for port 3:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>show lldp statistics ports 3
Command: show lldp statistics ports 3

Port ID : 3
---------------------------------------------
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal :0
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal : 0
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors :0
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal :0
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal :0
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal : 0
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal :0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

219
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

36
TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION COMMANDS
The Traffic Segmentation commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config
<portlist 1-10> forward_list [null | <portlist 1-10>]
traffic_segmentation
show traffic_
{<portlist 1-10>}
segmentation

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config traffic_segmentation
Purpose To configure traffic segmentation on the switch.
Syntax config traffic_segmentation <portlist 1-10> forward_list [null |
<portlist 1-10>]
Description The config traffic_segmentation command configures traffic
segmentation on the switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or a port channel for which the current traffic
segmentation configuration on the switch is to be displayed.
forward_list – Specifies a port or a port channel to receive forwarded
frames from the source ports specified in the portlist, above.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure ports 1~3 to be able to forward frames to port 5:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config traffic_segmentation 1-3 forward_list 5
Command: config traffic_segmentation 1-3 forward_list 5

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show traffic_segmentation
Purpose To display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the
switch.
Syntax show traffic_segmentation {<portlist 1-10>}
Description The show traffic_segmentation command displays the current
traffic segmentation configuration on the switch.
Parameters <portlist 1-10> – A port or a port channel for which the current traffic
segmentation configuration on the switch is to be displayed.

220
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show traffic_segmentation

Command: show traffic_segmentation

Traffic Segmentation Table

Port Forward Portlist

------ -----------------------
1 1-10
2 1-10
3 1-10
4 1-10
5 1-10
6 1-10
7 1-10
8 1-10
9 1-10
10 1-10

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

221
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

37
ETHERNET OAM COMMANDS
Ethernet OAM (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance) is a data link layer protocol which provides
network administrators the ability to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine the location of
failing links or fault conditions on point-to-point and emulated point-to-point Ethernet link. The Ethernet OAM
commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate parameters) in the
following table.

Command Parameter
config ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] mode [active | passive]
ports (mode)
config ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] state [enable | disable]
ports (state)
config ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor error_symbol {threshold <integer 1-
ports (link monitor error
4294967295> | window < integer 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}
symbol)
config ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor error_frame {threshold <integer> | window <
ports (link monitor error
integer 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}
frame)
config ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor error_frame_seconds {threshold < integer 1-
ports (link monitor error
4294967295> | window < integer 1000-60000> | notify_state [ enable | disable]}
frame seconds)
config ethernet_oam [all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor error_frame_period {threshold < integer 1-
ports (link monitor error 4294967295> | window < integer 148810-100000000> | notify_state [ enable |
frame period) disable]}
config ethernet_oam
ports (remote [all | <portlist 1-10>] remote_loopback [start | stop]
loopback)
config ethernet_oam
ports (received remote [all | <portlist 1-10>] received_remote_loopback [process | ignore]
loopback)
show ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] status
ports (status)
show ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] configuration
ports (configuration)
show ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] statistics
ports (statistics)
show ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] event_log {index <value_list}
ports (event log)
clear ethernet_oam
[all | <portlist 1-10>] [event_log| statistics]
ports
Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

222
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config ethernet_oam ports (mode)

Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM mode for ports.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] mode [active |
passive]
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure
Ethernet OAM for ports to operate in active or passive mode.
Parameters The command is used to configure Ethernet OAM for ports to
operate in active or passive mode.
Port configured in active mode:
(1) Initiate the exchange of Information OAMPDUs as defined by the
discovery state diagram.
(2) Active port is permitted to send any OAMPDU while connected to
a remote OAM peer entity in active mode.
(3) Active port operates in a limited respect if the remote OAM entity
is operating in passive mode.
(4) Active port should not respond to OAM remote loopback
commands and variable requests from a passive peer.

Port configured in passive mode:

(1) Do not initiate the discovery process
(2) React to the initiation of the Discovery process by the remote.
This eliminates the possibility of passive-to-passive links.
(3) Shall not send Variable request or loopback Control OAMPDUs”
for describe the active and passive mode.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure port 1 OAM mode to passive:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 mode passive
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 mode passive

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config ethernet_oam ports (state)

Purpose Used to enable or disable Ethernet OAM per port.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] state [enable |
disable]
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to enable or
disable Ethernet OAM function on a per port basis.
Enabling OAM initiates OAM discovery on a port. When OAM is enabled
on a port in active mode, that port will initiate discovery; if the port is not
OAM enabled, the port will not participate in the discovery process.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
state [enable | disable] – Specify to enable or disable the OAM
function for the listed ports. The default state is disabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

223
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To enable Ethernet OAM on port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error symbol)

Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring symbol error
configuration for ports.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor
error_symbol {threshold <integer> | window < integer 1000-
60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure
Ethernet OAM link monitoring symbol error for ports.
The link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and
indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the
statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of
coding symbol errors. When the number of symbol errors is equal to
or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event
notification state is enabled, it generates an error symbol period
event to notify the remote OAM peer.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
threshold <integer> – Specify the number of symbol errors in the
period that must be equal to or greater than in order for the event to
be generated. The default value of the threshold is 1 symbol error.
window <integer 1000-60000> –The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The
default value is 1000ms.
notify_state [enable | disable] – Specify to enable or disable event
notification. The default state is enabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the error symbol threshold to 2 and period to 1000ms for port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol
threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol threshold 2
window 1000 notify_state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

224
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame)

Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame
configuration for ports.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor
error_frame {threshold <integer> | window < integer 1000-
60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure
Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frames for ports.
Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and
indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the
counts of the number of frame errors as well as the number of
coding symbol errors. When the number of frame errors is equal to
or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event
notification state is enabled, it generates an error frame event to
notify the remote OAM peer.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
threshold <integer> – Specify the number of frame errors in the
period that must be equal to or greater than in order for the event to
be generated. The default value is 1 frame error.
window <integer 1000-60000> –The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The
default value is 1000ms.
notify_state [enable | disable] – Specify to enable or disable event
notification. The default state is enabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the error symbol threshold to 2 and period to 1000ms for port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame
threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame threshold 2
window 1000 notify_state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

225
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame seconds)

Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame seconds
configuration for ports.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor
error_frame_seconds {threshold < integer> | window < integer
1000-60000> | notify_state [ enable | disable]}
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure
Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame seconds for ports. An error
frame second is one second interval wherein at least one frame
error was detected.
Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and
indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the
counts of the number of frame errors as well as the number of
coding symbol errors. When the number of error frame seconds is
equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the
event notification state is enabled, it generates an error frame
seconds summary event to notify the remote OAM peer.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
threshold <integer> – Specify the number of error frame seconds in
the period that must be equal to or greater than in order for the event
to be generated. The default value is 1 frame error.
window <integer 1000-60000> –Specify the period of error frame
seconds summary event. The range is 1000ms-60000ms and the
default value is 60000 ms.
notify_state [enable | disable] – Specify to enable or disable event
notification. The default state is enabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.
Example usage:
To configure the error frame seconds threshold to 2 and period to 10000 ms for port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame
threshold 2 window 10000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame threshold 2
window 10000 notify_state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

226
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

config ethernet_oam ports (link monitor error frame period)

Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame period
for ports.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] link_monitor
error_frame_period {threshold < integer> | window < integer
148810-100000000> | notify_state [ enable | disable]}
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure
ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame period.
Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and
indicate link faults under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the
statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of
coding symbol errors. When the number of error frames is equal to
or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event
notification state is enabled, it generates an error frame period event
to notify the remote OAM peer.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
threshold <integer> – Specify the number of error frames in the
period that must be equal to or greater than in order for the event to
be generated. The default value of threshold is 1 error frame.
window <integer 148810-100000000> – Specify the period of error
frame period event. The period is specified by a number of received
frames. The default value is 148810.
notify_state [enable | disable] – Specify to enable or disable event
notification. The default state is enabled.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the error frame threshold to 10 and period to 1000000 for port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period
threshold 10 window 1000000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold
10 window 1000000 notify_state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config ethernet_oam ports (remote loopback)

Purpose Used to start or stop Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode for the
remote peer of the port.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>]
remote_loopback [start | stop]
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to start or stop
the remote peer to enter Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode.
To start the remote peer to enter remote loopback mode, the port
must be in active mode and the OAM connection established.
If the local client is already in remote loopback mode, then the
command cannot be applied.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be

227
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

configured.
remote_loopback [start | stop] – If start is specified, a request is sent
to the remote peer to change to remote loopback mode. If stop is
specified, a request is sent to the remote peer to change to normal
operation mode.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To start remote loopback on port 1 of unit 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

config ethernet_oam ports (received remote loopback)

Purpose Used to configure the method to process the received Ethernet OAM
remote loopback command.
Syntax config ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>]
received_remote_loopback [process | ignore]
Description The config ethernet_oam ports command is used to configure the
client to process or to ignore a received Ethernet OAM remote
loopback command.
In remote loopback mode, user traffic is not forwarded on the port. If
ignore is specified for received_remote_loopback, the specified port
will ignore all requests to transition to remote loopback mode and
prevent the switch from entering remote loopback mode, and so it
will continue to process user traffic regardless.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to be
configured.
received_remote_loopback [process | ignore] – Specifies whether to
process or ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback
command. The default method is “ignore”.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To configure the method of processing the received remote loopback command as “process” on port 1:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback
process
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback process

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

228
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show ethernet_oam ports (status)

Purpose Used to display primary controls and status information for Ethernet
OAM per port.
Syntax show ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] status
Description The show ethernet_oam ports command is used to show primary
controls and status information for Ethernet OAM on specified ports.
The information includes:
(1) OAM administration status: enabled or disabled
(2) OAM operation status. It maybe the below value:
 Disable: OAM is disabled on this port
 LinkFault: The link has detected a fault and is transmitting
OAMPDUs with a link fault indication.
 PassiveWait: The port is passive and is waiting to see if the peer
device is OAM capable.
ActiveSendLocal: The port is active and is sending local
information
 SendLocalAndRemote: The local port has discovered the peer
but has not yet accepted or rejected the configuration of the peer.
 SendLocalAndRemoteOk: The local device agrees the OAM
peer entity.
 PeeringLocallyRejected: The local OAM entity rejects the
remote peer OAM entity.
 PeeringRemotelyRejected: The remote OAM entity rejects the
local device.
 Operational: The local OAM entity learns that both it and the
remote OAM entity have accepted the peering.
 NonOperHalfDuplex: Since Ethernet OAM functions are not
designed to work completely over half-duplex port. This value
indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in half-duplex
operation.
(3) OAM mode: passive or active
(4) Maximum OAMPDU size: The largest OAMPDU that the OAM
entity supports. OAM entities exchange maximum OAMPDU sizes
and negotiate to use the smaller of the two maximum OAMPDU
sizes between the peers.
(5) OAM configuration revision: The configuration revision of the
OAM entity as reflected in the latest OAMPDU sent by the OAM
entity. The config revision is used by OAM entities to indicate that
configuration changes have occurred, which might require the peer
OAM entity to re-evaluate whether OAM peering is allowed.
(6) OAM Functions Supported: The OAM functions supported on
this port. These functions include:
 Unidirectional: It indicates that the OAM entity supports the
transmission of OAMPDUs on links that are operating in
unidirectional mode (traffic flowing in one direction only).
 Loopback: It indicates that the OAM entity can initiate and
respond to loopback commands.
 Link Monitoring: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and
receive Event Notification OAMPDUs.
 Variable: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive
variable requests to monitor the attribute value as described in the
IEEE 802.3 Clause 30 MIB.
(7) Loopback Status: The current status of the loopback function of
the port:
 No Loopback – The local and remote ports are not in loopback

229
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

mode.
 Initiating Loopback – The local port has sent the start remote
loopback request to the peer and is waiting for response.
 Remote Loopback – This indicates that both the local and
remote ports entered the loopback mode. Any non-OAM packet
received in the local port will be dropped.
 Local Loopback – This indicates that both the local and remote
ports entered the loopback mode. The local port is doing the
loopback. Any non-OAM packets received on the port will be sent
back to the same port.
 Terminate Loopback - The port is stopping loopback on the port.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to
display status.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show OAM control and status information on port 3:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ethernet_oam ports 3 status

Command: show ethernet_oam ports 3 status

Port 3
Local Client
------------------------------------------------------------
OAM : Disabled
Mode : Passive
Max OAMPDU : 1518
Remote Loopback : Support
Unidirection : Not Supported
Link Monitoring : Support
Variable Request : Support
PDU Revision :0
Operation Status : Disabled
Loopback Status : No Loopback

Remote Client
------------------------------------------------------------
Mode : Unknown
MAC Address : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Vendor (OUI) : 00:00:00

230
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

show ethernet_oam ports (configuration)

Purpose Used to display Ethernet OAM configuration per port.
Syntax show ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] configuration
Description The show ethernet_oam ports command is used to view Ethernet
OAM configurations for ports.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to
display status.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show Ethernet OAM configuration on port 3:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ethernet_oam ports 3 configuration

Command: show ethernet_oam ports 3 configuration

Port 3
------------------------------------------------------------
OAM : Disabled
Mode : Passive
Critical Event : Enabled
Remote Loopback OAMPDU : Not Processed

Symbol Error
Notify State : Enabled
Window : 1000
Threshold : 23

Frame Error
Notify State : Enabled
Window : 1000
Threshold :1

Frame Period Error

Notify State : Enabled
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a ALL

show ethernet_oam ports (statistics)

Purpose Used to display Ethernet OAM statistics for ports.
Syntax show ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] statistics
Description The show ethernet_oam ports command is used to display
Ethernet OAM ports statistics information.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to
display status.

231
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To show Ethernet OAM statistics on port 2:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ethernet_oam ports 2 statistics

Command: show ethernet_oam ports 2 statistics

Port 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Information OAMPDU Tx :0
Information OAMPDU Rx :0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Tx : 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Rx : 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Tx: 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx: 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx :0
Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx :0
Variable Request OAMPDU Tx :0
Variable Request OAMPDU Rx :0
Variable Response OAMPDU Tx :0
Variable Response OAMPDU Rx :0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs Tx :0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs Rx :0
Unsupported OAMPDU Tx :0
Unsupported OAMPDU Rx :0
Frames Lost Due To OAM :0

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show ethernet_oam ports (event log)

Purpose Used to display Ethernet OAM event log.
Syntax show ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] event_log {index
<value_list>}
Description The show ethernet_oam ports command is used to view ports
Ethernet OAM event log information. The Switch can buffer 1000
event logs. The event log is different from sys-log. It provides more
detailed information than sys-log. Each OAM event will be recorded
in both OAM event log and syslog. Specify an index to show a range
of events.
Parameters [all | <portlist 1-10>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to
display status.
index <value_list> – Specifies an index range to display.
Restrictions None.

232
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To show Ethernet OAM event log on port 1:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log index 2

Command: show ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log index 2

Port 1
------------------------------------------------------------
Event Listing:
Index Type Location Time Stamp Value Window
Threshold Accumulated errors
----- -------------------- ---------- -------------------- ---------- --------
-- ---------- --------------------
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

clear ethernet_oam ports

Purpose Used to clear Ethernet OAM port statistics or event log.
Syntax clear ethernet_oam ports [all | <portlist 1-10>] [event_log|
statistics]
Description The clear ethernet_oam ports command is used to clear Ethernet
OAM ports statistics or event log information.
Parameters [all | <portlist>] – Specifies a range of ports or all ports to clear OAM
statistics or event log.
[event_log | statistics]> – Specifies an index range to display.
Restrictions None.

Example usage:
To clear port 1 OAM statistics:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5> clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics

Command: clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

233
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

38
SAFEGUARD COMMANDS
The Safeguard commands in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are listed (along with the appropriate
parameters) in the following table.

Command Parameter
config
state [enable | disable]
safeguard_engine
show
safeguard_engine

Each command is listed in detail, as follows:

config safeguard_engine
Purpose To define the safeguard engine on the switch.
Syntax config safeguard_engine state [enable | disable]
Description To define the safeguard_engine on the switch.
Parameters state [enable | disable] – enable and disable Safeguard engine on
the switch.
Restrictions Only administrator or operator-level users can issue this command.

Example usage:
To enable the safeguard engine on the switch:

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>config safeguard_engine state enable

Command: config safeguard_engine state enable

Success!
DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

show safeguard_engine
Purpose To show the safeguard engine status on the switch.
Syntax show safeguard_engine
Description To show the safeguard engine on the switch.
Parameters None.
Restrictions None.

234
 DGS-1100-10/ME Metro Ethernet Managed Switch CLI Reference Guide

Example usage:
To show the safeguard engine status on the switch:
DGS-1100-10/ME:5> show safeguard_engine
Command: show safeguard_engine

Safeguard Engine State : Enable

DGS-1100-10/ME:5>

235